JP2019213914A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a deterioration of an impression caused by a decrease in ease of entering a game ball into first start winning means.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes: first and second start winning means into which game balls moving in the game area where the game balls shot by shooting means are guided can enter; first and second start winning detecting means for detecting the game balls that have entered into the first or second start winning means; main control means for performing a win/lose lottery whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player on the basis of detection of the first and second start winning means and generating the special game state on the basis of the result of the win/lose lottery; and front covering means that is provided at a distance that the game balls can pass between the game board and itself in the game area and covers at least the front of the first start winning means and the second start winning means collectively.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 45

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the launch means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a win / fail lottery as to whether or not a hit state is generated is performed, and a win / fail lottery is displayed on the variable display means. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Further, as the starting prize winning means, for example, a first starting prize winning means capable of always entering a game ball and a second starting prize means capable of allowing a game ball to enter only when a predetermined open lottery is won. In the configuration provided with the start winning prize means, if it is not possible to win the open lottery and it is difficult for the first starting prize means to enter the game ball, it is relatively difficult to smoothly advance the game. At the same time, there is a concern that the image of the gaming machine will be degraded and the willingness to play the game will be significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, for example, by arranging the first start winning means and the second start winning means close to each other and increasing the chances of opening the second start winning means, for example, the first start winning means can be provided. Even if it is difficult for a game ball to enter, a configuration in which a game ball can easily enter the second start winning means and overall decrease in ease of entering the start winning means can be avoided. It is possible to adopt.

JP 2006-271480 A

  However, in general, a pachinko machine is basically based on a game in which a game ball is launched aiming at a first starting winning means capable of always entering the game ball. For this reason, the impression as to whether or not the game ball easily enters the first start winning means tends to be stronger for the player. Therefore, even if the ease of entering the second start winning means is improved, if it is still difficult to allow the game balls to enter the first start winning means, the impression on the gaming machine and the like may deteriorate. Is concerned.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object the deterioration of an impression caused by a decrease in the ease with which game balls enter the first starting winning means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the above.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is:
Firing means for firing a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
First start winning means in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
Second start winning means configured to be able to change the state between an open state in which game balls moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which entry is impossible or difficult to enter,
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball having entered the first start winning means;
Second start winning detection means for detecting a game ball having entered the second start winning means;
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection unit or the second start winning detection unit, a win / fail lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and based on the result of the win / fail lottery. A main control means for generating the special gaming state,
A pre-covering means provided at a distance that allows a game ball to pass between the game board and the game board in the game area, and collectively covers at least the front of the first start winning means and the second start winning means. It is characterized by having.

  According to the first aspect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting winning means.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing composition of an inner frame, a game board, etc. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process performed by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal figure fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a general figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of various counters used for determination of a decoration design etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows a hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows a suspension process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold icon setting process. It is an explanatory view of a reservation icon pattern storage table. It is a flowchart which shows a pseudo hold icon setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a pseudo blade opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows a pseudo feather production process. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decorative design display apparatus (hold display area). It is a front view of a starting winning unit, (a) shows a state where a pseudo blade member is in a standby position, and (b) shows a state where a pseudo blade member is in a functional position. (A) is a front view of a base plate, (b) is a rear view of a front decoration part (cover unit). It is a perspective view which shows a blade member, a pseudo blade member, etc. It is a partially expanded sectional view of a start winning unit. It is a perspective view which shows the blade member and the pseudo blade member in another embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the blade member in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the start winning unit in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the starting winning unit of another embodiment, (a) is a front schematic diagram of a blade member and a base plate, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a base plate, (C) is a perspective view of the blade member. It is a perspective view for explaining the front decoration part etc. in another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of the decoration design display apparatus (hold display area) in another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of the decoration design display apparatus (hold display area) in another embodiment. It is a schematic cross section for explaining the payout passage (payout time adjusting means) in another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame constituting an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and one side of the outer frame 11 has an inner frame as a game board mounting frame. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for convenience, a game member (a nail, an accessory, or the like) provided on the game board 30 and a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame forming portion 11a and a lower side frame forming portion 11b formed of a wooden plate, and a left side frame forming portion 11c and a right side frame forming portion 11d are formed of an aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame forming portion 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are accommodated in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, the right side frame forming portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 protruding inward of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction. The extension wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the right side rear side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking members of the locking device 600 are locked are provided on the front side of the extension wall portion 83. The lower receiving portion 85 is provided with a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later, protruding toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is formed integrally with the back part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. The front frame set 14, like the inner frame 12, can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set vertically along the left side as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be configured so as to be directly releasably supported by the outer frame 11, not through the inner frame 12.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape similar to the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside via the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided at the lower center thereof. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball release lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball firing handle (hereinafter, referred to as "handle 18") protruding toward the near side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detecting means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is fired by a firing device 60 as a firing means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. The handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In a state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, the firing of the game ball by the firing device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. For this reason, it is possible to perform the turning operation of the handle 18 while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a firing device 60 described later while aligning them in a line. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via a lower plate communication path 71 and a discharge port 16 described later.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate 19, a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided. Thereby, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. The rental ball is supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, that is, a cash machine.

  Further, a ball pullout button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball release button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. In other words, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball pullout button 123.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 having a built-in LED are provided, and by pressing the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a decorative symbol display device 42 and the like described later are provided. , A corresponding effect is performed, or the effect content is changed.

  Further, on the front surface of the front frame set 14, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface set. These light-emitting means change the light-emitting mode according to a change in the game state and the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window 101, there is provided an annular illuminated portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED. Further, on both sides of the ring-shaped illumination unit 102, an error display lamp 104 which is turned on when a predetermined error occurs is provided. In addition, a large number of fine through holes are formed above the error display lamps 104 in the annular illumination part 102 in correspondence with the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back of the front frame set 14. .

  On the back side of the front frame set 14, a glass unit 137 is attached. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are separately attached in a front-to-back pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 at the rear side of the window hole 39 so as to be in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Accordingly, a substantially central portion of the front of the game board 30 is exposed to the front of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached. I have. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type firing device is adopted as the firing device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device for guiding game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to a launching position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and a first special display device as variable display means. 43L, a second special display device 43R, a variation specifying lamp 40, and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning holes such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning devices 33a and 33B, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 is detected. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, three balls are entered when the first start winning device 33a is entered, two balls are entered when the second started winning device 33b is entered, and the general winning opening 31 is entered. It is configured such that 10 balls are paid out when there is a ball, and 12 game balls are paid out when there is a ball in the variable winning device 32. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 which does not enter the ball just by passing the game ball (and is not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the payout of the game ball is not performed. . In addition, the first starting prize device 33a, the general prize port 31, and the through gate 34 are configured such that game balls moving in the game area can always enter or pass therethrough. The two-start winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost portion of the game area, and game balls that have not won various prize ports such as the general prize port 31 are provided with the out port 36. It is discharged out of the game area through. In addition, a large number of nails (game nails) are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided. ing.

  The variable display device unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is arranged in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround a decorative symbol display device 42 described later.

  A pair of left and right entrances 151 is provided in the upper part of the center frame 47, and a game ball entering the entrance 151 has a warp channel 152 formed inside the center frame 47. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42. The game ball guided to the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153 and falls down from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends back and forth at the center of the stage 153 to play the game ball. It may fall into the guide groove 154 that guides forward.

  Below the variable display device unit 35, a first start winning device 33a having a start winning port through which a game ball can always win is provided. The lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is located immediately above the first start winning device 33a, and the game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 enters the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. It is configured to be spherical. Note that the first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease with which game balls enter the first start winning device 33a.

  A second start winning device 33b is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. The second start winning device 33b includes a pair of blade members 37 that are rotatable and displaceable adjacent to the left and right sides of the start winning opening of the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position extending vertically, the tip of the blade member 37 is adjacent to the first start winning device 33a. As a result, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the second start winning device 33b and the first start winning device 33a, and the second start winning device 33b closes the game ball so that it cannot enter the start winning opening. It is in a state. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 changes to the open position in which the blade member 37 opens outward, the second starting winning device 33b enters an open state in which a game ball can enter the starting winning opening.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the first start winning device and the first start winning device 33a as a constantly starting dynamic winning device, the second start winning device, and the opening / closing start winning device are used. The second starting winning device 33b is unitized and attached to the game board 30. Hereinafter, a unit in which the first start winning unit 33a and the second start winning unit 33b are unitized is referred to as a "start winning unit 401".

  The variable winning device 32 is provided below the starting winning unit 401. The variable prize device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is in an open state in which game balls can be won in a big hit state or the like. Although not shown, the variable winning device 32 includes a special winning opening communicating with the rear of the gaming board 30, a special winning shutter for opening and closing the special winning opening, and a special winning opening for operating the special winning shutter. The variable prize device 32 (large prize port) is provided with a solenoid and a count switch 223 for detecting a game ball entering the large prize port, by driving and controlling the solenoid for the large prize port and opening and closing the large prize shutter. Is switched between the closed state and the open state.

  Through gates 34 are arranged at the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35 in the game area. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

  Further, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) for determining whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and the ordinary symbol display device 41 is used. A variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery is performed. Then, when the ball is won by the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

  As will be described later in detail, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b respectively include a first start winning switch 224a as first start winning detecting means for detecting a winning game ball, and a second start winning device. A second starting prize switch 224b is provided as a prize detecting means, and when a game ball is detected by the starting prize switch 224a, 224b, a lottery (whether lottery or not) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state or the like. ) Is performed, and the variable display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R, which will be described later, and the decorative symbol display device 42. Then, in the case of winning in the winning or losing lottery, a jackpot state or the like in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there is a “low-probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the win / fail lottery, and a “high-probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low-probability state in the win / loss lottery. Furthermore, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, and it is easy to allow game balls to enter the second start winning device 33b. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the low probability state and the low ball entry state are referred to as `` normal mode '', the low probability state and the high ball entry state are referred to as `` time reduction mode '', and the high probability state and the high ball entry state A certain state is called a “probable change mode”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode and the probable change mode are continued until the big hit state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode does not require the big hit state even if the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbols are used. When the variable display on the display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times, the process ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

  In the present embodiment, the first start winning device 33a (so-called "navel") wins by a winning / rejection lottery performed when a game ball enters, and the second start winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip"). , Denchu "), the type of hit given does not change between the winning and the non-winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the game (the type determination referred to when determining the type of hit state) The table is the same).

  More specifically, the jackpot types include a 15-round probable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15RS”), a 15-round regular jackpot (hereinafter “15RN”), and a 2-round probable variable jackpot (hereinafter “2RS”). There is. As for “15RS” and “15RN”, it is determined that the variable prize device 32 is opened for 30 seconds or that eight game balls enter the variable prize device 32 after the variable prize device 32 is opened. Regarding “15RS” as a round, the big hit state ends after the repetition is repeated 15 times. On the other hand, regarding “2RS”, the opening of the variable winning device 32 for 0.4 seconds is defined as one round, and this is repeated twice, and then the big hit state ends. In other words, as for “15RS” and “15RN”, while the jackpot is a jackpot where a large increase in game balls can be expected during the jackpot state (so-called “hit with a ball hit”), “2RS” indicates a large increase in game balls. Is a big hit that cannot be expected (so-called “big hit with no balls”).

  After the jackpot state of “15RS” ends, the “probable change mode” is given, after the jackpot state of “2RS” ends, “(special) likelihood change mode” is given, and after the jackpot state of “15RN” ends, “time” A "shortening mode" (in this example, 100 variable displays) is provided. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the ball entry into the first starting winning device 33a, "15RS" is obtained at a rate of 50%, "15RN" is obtained at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 10% is obtained. Becomes “2RS”.

  In addition, a first special display device 43L that teaches the result of a winning or losing lottery based on a ball entering the first start winning device 33a, and a second or lesser that teaches the result of a winning or losing lottery based on a ball entering the second start winning device 33b. The two special display devices 43R are each configured by two segment display devices, and are configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at positions visible to the player (in this example, positions at the lower right of the game area where game balls cannot pass).

  Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the first special display device 43L performs switching display (variable display) of the special symbol, and the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b. A special symbol switching display (variable display) is performed on the second special display device 43R when a ball is entered. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, after the special symbols are displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the winning / rejection lottery, that is, "big hit", , "Off" is definitely displayed. For example, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, a special symbol (combination of lit segments) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). ), And when a predetermined time elapses, one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for a few seconds). Then, for example, when a "big hit" is won in the win / fail lottery, a corresponding special symbol is displayed at the time of stoppage of fluctuation, and a big hit state occurs.

  Furthermore, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, the special symbol to be stopped also teaches the type of the jackpot, that is, any one of "15RS", "15RN", and "2RS". Further, the special display devices 43L and 43R for teaching one jackpot type have not one stop mode but a plurality of stop modes, and one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. Further, when the variable display or the determination display is being performed on one of the first special display device 43L and the second special display device 43R, the other is turned off (“−” is displayed. However, when the variable display and the determination display are not performed in either case, “−” is displayed in both cases.

  In addition, the variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 (position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) that fluctuates and displays when the through gate 34 passes, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. A decorative symbol display device 42 for performing variable display in accordance with variable display is provided.

  The decorative design display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to variably display a decorative design as identification information. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 uses the auxiliary control device 262 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The display contents are determined, and the display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas of upper, middle, and lower, and in each symbol display area, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numeric symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are provided. The decorative symbols are displayed sequentially (variable display), and thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area). . For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special display device 43 </ b> L, 43 </ b> R, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the jackpot. (For example, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, The same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area and the lower symbol display area), and the big hit state is started. In addition, among the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, basically, the upper symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed first is referred to as the “first symbol display area”. , And the lower symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed secondly is also referred to as the "second symbol display area", and the middle symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. This is also referred to as “third symbol display area”.

  When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, for example, as a preceding stage. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, the occurrence of the reach state does not necessarily result in a jackpot, and may sometimes deviate.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If it is performed (when the slot is stopped and displayed), a big hit state is given. In the case of odd-numbered slots, “15RS” is generated, and in the case of even-numbered slots, “15RN” is generated.

  In addition, the combination of decorative patterns other than the slotted pattern basically teaches "out of alignment". However, in the case of "2RS", the decorative pattern is specified on the active line instead of the slotted pattern. (Combination of chance symbols, so-called chance eyes). In the present embodiment, a mode in which “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas is a combination of chance symbols.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects for teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying. More specifically, a “probable change stage” that determines that you are staying in the probable change mode, a “normal stage” that determines that you are staying in the normal mode, and a “pull back” that stays in the time reduction mode There is a stage. In other words, when "15RS" is won, the game shifts to the "probable change stage" after the end of the jackpot state. In addition, when the winning of “15RN” is achieved, the process shifts to the “pull-back stage” after the end of the jackpot state, and further, when the variable display is performed 100 times in the pull-back stage, the process shifts to the “normal stage”. In addition, in the present embodiment, as a kind of the “probable change stage”, there is a “special probable change stage” which shifts after the big hit state of “2RN” ends. In the “special probable change stage”, the background slightly changes compared to the normal stage and the like, and the effect balance changes (for example, an effect pattern that is usually hard to select is easily selected).

  Further, when a game ball newly enters the first or second starting prize device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variable display is performed. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed at the time. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be suspended is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, the game ball which has won the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b have won. Up to four variable displays (total of eight variable displays) are reserved for each game ball.

  In the present embodiment, a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter, referred to as a “first variable display”) and a game ball displayed on the second start winning device 33b are provided. Regardless of which of the variable displays based on the incoming ball (hereinafter, referred to as "second variable display"), the game is digested in the reserved order. That is, for example, the order in which the second variable displays are suspended after the first variable display that has already been suspended is made earlier than the first variable display. Therefore, it is not a configuration in which either is preferentially digested.

  Furthermore, the number of suspensions of the first variable display is provided immediately above the first special display device 43L, is lit and displayed by a first suspension lamp 46a capable of emitting blue light, and the number of suspensions of the second variable display is: The second special display device 43R is disposed immediately above the second special display device 43R, and is lit by a second holding lamp 46b that can emit red light. The number of the holding lamps 46a and 46b is equal to the maximum number of holdings of the first variable display and the second variable display, each of which is four, and is the same as the number of the first variable display or the second variable display being held. Light. The display contents of the holding lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub-control device 262 described later. When a new game ball wins the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the display of the fluctuation is also suspended.

  In the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the entry of the game ball into the start winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (that the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is a decorative symbol. The display device 42 is also taught. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 43, a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held is displayed in the lower part (hold display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42. A maximum of eight hold icons 461 are displayed, and are sequentially digested from the left one.

  Furthermore, as for the hold icon 461 of the present embodiment, there is no information as to which of the hold icon 461 corresponds to the first variable display and the second variable display. Even if it corresponds to the display, it has a common mode.

  In the variable display device unit 35 of the present embodiment (in this example, the position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47), the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 is the first variable display and the second variable display. A fluctuation specifying lamp 40 indicating which of the fluctuation displays is provided. The variation specifying lamp 40 includes a blue LED and a red LED, and emits blue light when the decorative pattern display device 42 performs the first variable display, and emits the second variable light. When the display is being performed, red light is emitted.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light and display, for example, “O” or “X” as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, changes the normal symbol from “O” to → Switching display (variation display) is performed at high speed, such as “x” → “o” →. Then, when the change display is stopped for a few seconds with the symbol “○” (winning symbol), the second start winning device 33b (the blade member 37) is opened for a predetermined time. The display content of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display for that time is performed after the end of the fluctuation display being performed at that time. It is a configuration that is performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable display of the ordinary symbol is suspended is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is suspended up to four times. In addition, the number of times the variable symbols are normally displayed is arranged in the variable display device unit 35 and is illuminated by a holding lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The number of the holding lamps 44 is four each, which is the same as the maximum holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol, and is lit by the same number as the number of the variable displays held.

  The high ball entry state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the variable display time of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, and (2) one opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( (Specified time) is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low ball entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times of opening of the second starting prize device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is larger than in the low ball entry state, and (5) A winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is lower than in the low ball entry state. To a higher state. The high ball entry state in the present embodiment employs the configurations of (2) and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or an arbitrary combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high ball entry state”. . This makes it easier for the game balls to frequently win the second start winning device 33b, increases the number of executions of the success / failure lottery, and achieves a good ball holding state in which the decrease in the ball possessed by the player is suppressed. .

  However, in the present embodiment, even in the low ball entry state, the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 41 is the same as that in the high ball entry state (1.86 seconds), and the ball is won by the ball entry support lottery. In this case, the time during which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is also substantially the same (5.7 seconds) as in the high ball entry state (5.8 seconds). Furthermore, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery is also 15/233, which is a probability that it is relatively easy to win as compared with a conventional pachinko machine that is less than 1/100. As a result, even in the low ball entry state, the second starting winning device 33b is relatively easily opened, and the change display of the special symbol is easily held.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is provided with a rail 50 for guiding a game ball fired from the firing device 60 to an upper portion of the game board 30. Thereby, the game ball fired by the turning operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rail 61 and the rail 50.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a situation in which a game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50 again. A return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, a substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball hit by the launching device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball preventing member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. I will

  Now, the present embodiment is characterized by a start winning unit 401 in which the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are unitized. Hereinafter, a description will be given mainly of the start winning unit 401 with reference to FIGS.

  The start winning unit 401 is separated from a substantially plate-shaped base plate 402 attached to the front surface of the game board 30 in a contact state with a base plate 402 in front of the base plate 402 by a distance that allows a game ball to pass therethrough. And a front decoration portion 403 as a substantially disc-shaped front covering means (general portion) provided so as to cover at least a first start winning device 33a and a second start winning device 33b. I have. The front decoration unit 403 is made of a transparent or translucent resin material (for example, polycarbonate), and is used to move a game ball moving around the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. It is configured to be visible through 403.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), FIG. 47, etc., the base plate 402 communicates with an opening formed in the game board 30 to form a first start winning device 33a and a second start winning device 33b. A pair of upper and lower discharge holes 404 for discharging the game balls entering the rear of the game board 30 through the openings are formed. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided in front of each of the discharge holes 404 formed in the base plate 402, and open upward and have a substantially U-shaped cross section. A receiving section 405 is provided. The opening formed in the upper part of the ball receiving portion 405 forms a starting winning opening. Further, the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 405 is shaped to guide the game ball backward (provided with a portion inclined downward and backward), and has entered the ball receiving portion 405 through the starting winning opening. The game ball is guided to the discharge hole 404 at the rear.

  The game nails standing on the front surface of the game board 30 include a pair of life nails 406 provided on the left and right sides of the start winning opening of the first start winning device 33a. The game ball that has passed between 406 enters the first starting winning device 33a. In the present embodiment, the starting winning unit 401 is arranged below the life nail 406 so that the life nail 406 and the front decoration part 403 do not overlap.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45B, in the present embodiment, the front side of the ball receiving portion 405 is closed by the front decoration portion 403. In other words, the front wall portions of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are constituted by the front decoration portion 403. In particular, in this embodiment, each ball receiving portion 405 is formed integrally with the front decoration portion 403, and the ball receiving portion 405 is also made of a transparent or translucent resin material (like the front decoration portion 403). The ball receiving portion 405 of the first start winning device 33a is made of a transparent resin). Hereinafter, a member in which the front decoration portion 403 and the ball receiving portion 405 are integrated is referred to as a “cover unit 407”.

  Further, the cover unit 407 is provided with an attachment boss 408 for attaching the cover unit 407 to the base plate 402, integrally with each ball receiving portion 405. The boss hole of the mounting boss 408 is opened rearward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45A, a mounting hole 409 is formed in the base plate 402 corresponding to the mounting boss 408, and the mounting boss 408 and the mounting hole 409 are aligned. By fixing the screws from the rear side of the base plate 402, the cover unit 407 is attached to the base plate 402. The base plate 402 may be provided with a support rib projecting forward and supporting the lower surface side of the ball receiving portion 405.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, the base plate 402 of the present embodiment extends to the left and right sides of the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403. Furthermore, a pair of left and right guides, which are formed so as to protrude forward from the base plate 402 in the extended portion, and guide the game balls moving in the left and right game areas on the left and right sides of the front decoration section 403 to the front decoration section 403 side. Slider 411 is provided. When the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state, the game ball guided by the slider 411 falls on the blade member 37 in the open position with a relatively high probability, and enters the second starting winning device 33b. I am going to enter the ball. Further, a screw hole 412 for fixing the base plate 402 to the game board 30 with a screw is formed in the extended portion in the base plate 402.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 47 and the like, in the present embodiment, a game ball moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving section 405 is guided to the ball receiving section 405 corresponding to the second starting winning device 33b. Only the blade member 37 that can be displaced between the open position and the closed position that regulates the movement of the game ball moving in the game area beside the ball receiving portion 405 toward the ball receiving portion 405 is provided. A pseudo blade as movable covering means capable of being displaced between a functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member 37 in the open position and a standby position capable of covering the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position. A member 431 is provided. In the present embodiment, the blade member 37 located at the functional position constitutes a guide unit.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the blade member 37 has a role of placing a game ball and guiding the ball to the ball receiving portion 405 when the blade member is set to the open position, so that the front and rear widths (thickness) are larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is largely configured. On the other hand, the pseudo blade member 431 disposed in front of the blade member 37 (between the blade member 37 and the front decoration portion 403) has the blade member 37 in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. In this case (see FIG. 47 (c)), the thickness is thinner than the blade member 37 so that the game ball can pass through the game area (between the pseudo blade member 431 and the base plate 402) behind the pseudo blade member 431. Is configured.

  The mechanism for operating the blade member 37 includes a blade-side motor 421 serving as a blade-side driving unit for displacing the blade member 37, a substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 having one end connected to the blade member 37, and A blade-side gear 426 is provided on the other end of the blade shaft 425 and meshes with a blade-side pinion 423 provided on the blade-side drive shaft 422 of the blade-side motor 421. The blade-side motor 421 of the present embodiment is electrically connected to a main control device 261 described later. Further, the blade shaft 425 is fixed to the blade member 37 in a state of being inserted into a substantially circular through hole 427 (see FIG. 46B) formed in the blade member 37 and penetrating back and forth.

  Further, as a mechanism for operating the pseudo blade member 431, a pseudo side motor 432 as a pseudo side driving unit for displacing the pseudo blade member 431, and a substantially columnar pseudo shaft 433 having one end connected to the pseudo blade member 431. And a pseudo gear 436 provided on the other end of the pseudo shaft 433 and engaged with a pseudo pinion 435 provided on a pseudo drive shaft 434 of the pseudo motor 432. The pseudo-side motor 432 of this embodiment is electrically connected to a sub-control device 262 described later.

  In addition, the dummy shaft 433 is inserted inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425, and the pseudo blade member 431 is located at the front end of the dummy shaft 433 protruding forward from the front end of the blade shaft 425. The pseudo gear 436 is attached to the rear end of the dummy shaft 433 that projects rearward from the rear end of the blade shaft 425. With this configuration, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member 37 and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member 431 extend (almost) on the same straight line. Have been.

  In addition, the front end of the dummy shaft 433 has a substantially D-shaped cross section, and the front end is inserted into a substantially semicircular recess (not shown) formed on the rear surface of the pseudo blade member 431. In this state, the pseudo blade member 431 is fixed. Further, on the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431, a substantially columnar shaft support protrusion 437 formed so as to protrude toward the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431 with the formation of the concave portion is provided. Has been. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the present embodiment, a concave bearing portion 438 into which the shaft support convex portion 437 is inserted is formed on the rear surface of the front decorative portion 403. Accordingly, the front end side of the dummy shaft 433, and thus the front end side of the blade shaft 425, is supported, and deformation and displacement of the dummy shaft 433 and the blade shaft 425 can be suppressed. Note that a bearing portion that supports the lower part of the outer peripheral edge on the rotation center side of the blade member 37 or the pseudo blade member 431 may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the starting winning unit 401, the deformed whale is configured to be visually recognized. In other words, as shown in FIG. 44, the substantially disk-shaped front decoration section 403 includes a character display section 441 in which whales are basically drawn in a colored and transparent hue, and other parts (around the character display section 441). ) Is a general portion 442 that is colorless and transparent (colored and transparent having a hue smaller than that of the character display portion 441 is also possible). However, the character display unit 441 does not draw the forelimb of the whale. Instead, the pseudo wing member 431 represents the forelimb of the whale.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), FIG. 46, and the like, the pseudo wing member 431 has a shape (fin shape) in which the forelimb of a whale is imaged, and coloring of the whale of the character display portion 441 (for example, translucent dark blue). And is made of a colored and transparent resin material. When the pseudo wing member 431 is displaced to the functional position, the forelimb of the whale is configured to protrude to the side of the body of the whale. In the present embodiment, the distal end of the pseudo vane member 431 in the functional position is located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403 (general portion 442).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47A, in the present embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 at the standby position is located behind the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403 (most of the pseudo blade member 431 is not shown). (Hidden by the character display unit 441). In the present embodiment, the whale corresponds to the third object, the part other than the front leg of the whale corresponds to the first object, the character display unit 441 of the front decoration unit 403 corresponds to the first object display unit, and the whale Corresponds to the second object, and the pseudo wing member 431 corresponds to the second object display unit. Furthermore, the state where the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position corresponds to the completed display state, and the state where the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position corresponds to the incomplete display state.

  Also, the blade member 37 is configured to be located behind the character display unit 441 when it is at the closed position (the entire blade member 37 at the closed position is hidden by the character display unit 441). In addition, the blade member 37 of this embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Further, the upper surface (game ball guide surface) and the front surface of the blade member 37 in the open position are flat (smooth) surfaces. The front and rear surfaces of the pseudo blade member 431 are also flat surfaces.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 (b) and 47, the pseudo blade member 431 has a larger area than the blade member 37 when viewed from the front, the blade member 37 is in the open position, and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the open position. In both the case where the blade member 431 is in the functional position and the case where the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the entire front surface of the blade member 37 is covered by the pseudo blade member 431. It has become to be. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47A, when the blade member 37 is at the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is at the standby position, the function position side of the pseudo blade member 431 is located. The side portion is configured to be located on the open position side of the surface of the blade member 37 on the open position side. Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, when the blade member 37 is in the open position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, the upper side of the pseudo blade member 431 (the side portion on the standby position side). ), The upper surface (the game ball guide surface, the surface on the standby position side) of the blade member 37 is positioned higher (closed position side).

  Although described in detail later, in the present embodiment, among the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431, the blade member 37 does not operate alone, and the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position. Is configured such that the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced from the standby position to the functional position while covering the front of the blade member 37. Further, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position while covering the front of the blade member 37. I have. On the other hand, the pseudo blade member 431 may operate alone, and as shown in FIG. 47C, the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, but the blade member 37 is in the closed position. Is also configured to occur. That is, in a state where the blade member 37 is at the closed position, it is possible to derive a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member 37 is at the open position (a position other than the closed position). In the present embodiment, the pseudo vane member 431 and a mechanism for operating the same (including an operation control function described later) constitute pseudo vane opening means.

  By the way, an area (hereinafter, also referred to as a “covering area”) of which the front is covered by the front decoration section 403 in the game area is covered by a cover at a position below (the ball receiving section 405 of) the second starting winning device 33b. A pseudo prize detection switch 445 is provided as pseudo prize detection means capable of detecting game balls moving in the area. Since the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is provided in the game area, the game ball continues to move in the game area downstream of the pseudo prize detection switch 445 even after being detected by the pseudo prize detection switch 445. .

  Further, a guide base 446 is provided in the covering area so as to protrude forward from the base plate 402 and guides game balls moving in the covering area to the pseudo winning detection switch 445 as pseudo winning guide means. ing. The guide bases 446 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is mounted so as to be sandwiched between them. Further, the guide stand 446 has a curved shape along the lower edge of the character display section 441 of the front decoration section 403 when the start winning unit 401 is viewed from the front, and furthermore, the guide stand 446 and The entire pseudo winning detection switch 445 is configured so that the front thereof is covered by the character display unit 441 (to be hidden by the character display unit 441).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, a front decoration is provided below a region (hereinafter, also referred to as a “specific covering region”) of the game region, the front of which is covered by the pseudo blade member 431 at the functional position. There is an area where the base plate 402 is not provided, although the area is covered by the portion 403 and the front is covered. As shown in FIG. 47 (c) and the like, in the present embodiment, in such a region, a plurality of (blank) members are arranged so as to be adjacent to the lower edge portion (below the specific covering region) of the pseudo blade member 431 at the functional position. In the example, two game nails (hereinafter, referred to as “guide nails 448”) are erected on the game board 30. The plurality of guide nails 448 are arranged at a lower position toward the center in the width direction of the start winning unit 401 (the guide stand 446 side), and basically, a game in contact with the upper surface side of the guide nail 448. The ball is guided to the guide table 446 side (a game ball in contact with the upper surface side of the guide nail 448 is not always placed on the guide table 446, but is placed with a relatively high probability).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 47B, when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the game ball hardly contacts the guide nail 448 or the guide base 446 located immediately below the blade member 37. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (c), when the blade member 37 is at the closed position, the blade member 37 enters the covering area and moves to the side of the blade member 37 at the closed position. The game ball to be played comes into contact with the guide nail 448 and rests on the guide base 446 or directly rests on the guide stand 446. The guide nail 448 is disposed adjacent to the pseudo blade member 431 in the function position and the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403, and the pseudo blade member 431 in the function position is also viewed from the front. Since the game ball is continuously extended with the character display portion 441, the game ball guided to the guide base 446 side by the guide nail 448 may continue to be hidden behind the pseudo wing member 431 or the character display portion 441. Yes, in this case, it is difficult to visually follow the movement of such a game ball. In the present embodiment, the guide base 446 and the guide nail 448 constitute a course changing unit.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window 101 on the rear side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication path 71 connected from a dispensing mechanism 352 to a discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15 described below, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the dispensing mechanism 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and returns on the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is transferred to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Is discharged.

  Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 denotes a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward by an urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end of the lower plate communication passage 71 on the entrance side. In addition, the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed. A game ball can pass through a gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow at the entrance side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It is paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a fullness detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate communication passage 71. The existence of the fullness detection switch grasps that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls stay in the lower plate communication passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected by the fullness detection switch for a predetermined time, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using a display, a sound, or the like on the decorative symbol display device 42. Is performed. It should be noted that when the game balls stay in the lower plate communication passage 71 and the game ball is no longer detected by the fullness detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is released.

  Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally so as to partially overlap one another, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is herein referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole at the center of the game board 30. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, which faces the front from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. Attached to.

  The decorative design display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative design display device 42 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the back surface of the frame cover 213. Is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative design display device 42 (the accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and is fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board and the like for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 are provided. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside is visible.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won various winning ports (not shown). The game balls collected by the ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage 217 described later, and are discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mount for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  Main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened without leaving a predetermined mark. Thereby, it can be easily found that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball detection switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the various winning ports, corresponding to various winning ports such as the general winning port 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided on the variable winning device 32. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. I have. This first board relay board relays the winning opening switch 221 and the like to the main controller 261 and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball detection switches are taken into main controller 261. Then, a payout command (payout number of game balls) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are output based on an output signal from the payout control device 311. Is carried out (except for the case where it is detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown, on the back surface of the game board 30, there is provided a solenoid for a special winning opening that opens a special winning opening in the variable winning device 32. Further, the second start winning device 33b is provided with the blade-side motor 421 for driving the blade member 37 to open and close as described above. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board-surface relay board (not shown) for relaying these solenoids and motors to the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is obtained by integrating a resin-back pack 351 and a payout mechanism 352 for playing balls. The back pack unit 203 is supported to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (the upper right in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like of a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, reference numerals are not given, but, for example, terminals for outputting information on the current game state (big hit state, probability change mode, etc.), front frame set 14 and inner frame detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later. A terminal for outputting information relating to the opening of the terminal 12; a terminal for outputting information relating to various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tank full error, a tank ball empty error, and a payout error; and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information on the number of balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that projects rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover 354 also covers the upper part and the right part (the left part in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 together. Thus, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail 357 is provided vertically below the tank rail 356. Are linked. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  In the dispensing mechanism 352, a dispensing relay board 381 for relaying a signal of a dispensing command from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in a main power from the outside is installed. I have. Main power of, for example, 24 V AC is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage 217 into which game balls collected by the above-described ball collection mechanism flow, and a game ball is provided at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won each of the winning ports such as the general winning port 31 collect through the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage 217. The out port 36 also communicates with the discharge passage 217, and game balls that have not won any of the winning ports are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is good also as.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. Attached to.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Note that the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, but are actually configured by one board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a, and is fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that the trace of opening the board box 311a remains. Has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a, and is fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside is visible.

  The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed down at the time of a payout error such as a clogged ball of the payout motor, the payout motor rotates forward and reverse, and the clogged ball is cleared (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the state at the time of the power failure is maintained, and when returning from the power failure (power recovery), it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. it can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, at the time of closing of the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored and retained. Input.

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the right rear surface of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into a key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the key is rotated by one side to rotate the inside. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  As described above, the extension wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower section corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 as described above. reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and to operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side. The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 has a detection unit that can protrude and retract with respect to the switch main body. The front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261. When the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body and is immersed in the switch body, an OFF signal is output. The output is to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 to be turned off when the front frame set 14 is closed, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detecting portion is pressed by a pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 to be turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A main controller 261 (main board) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the CPU 501 and a return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I / O are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data that is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing. Conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed when the power is turned on (including the power-on due to power failure and the same applies hereinafter). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to an NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

  If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to a CPU 501 including the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 is connected to a RAM erasure switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and a normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43L and 43R and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input / output port 505 includes a winning opening switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, various switches of the handle 18, and the like. Various electrical components such as various detection switches, various substrates, a solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32, and a blade-side motor 421 for opening and closing the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminals (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminals and the like constitute the input / output port 505.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 as an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the program, an input / output port 554, a bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown). It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  The CPU 551, the ROM 552, and the RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected to the input / output port 554. Further, the input / output port 554 includes a speaker SP, holding lamps 46a and 46b, an effect button 125, a cross button 126, various illumination parts and lamps 102 and 104, a pseudo winning detection switch 445 provided in the starting winning unit 401, A pseudo-side motor 432 for operating the pseudo blade member 431 is connected.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display. In the present embodiment, the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 constitute a display control unit. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, the decorative symbol variable display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the special symbol variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  The payout control device 311 controls the payout of a prize ball or a loaned ball by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

  The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all data stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 513a are stored. Data is backed up. If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the configuration may be such that data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, and data stored in the work area is not backed up.

  The backup area 513a includes a stack pointer at power-off, each register, and the like, in order to return the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off at the time of power-on when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This area stores values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, similarly to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, an NMI interrupt process as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag in which permission to pay out prize balls by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from the server.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting prize ball payout is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received. Is turned off when the process is restored before the power supply is shut down. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing an initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing the payout of a prize ball, and the main control device 261 is restored. These are the three payout return commands transmitted in such a case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. The command reception flag is turned on when any of the commands is received. The signal is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

  The command buffer includes a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from main controller 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all storage areas, the command is stored at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erasure switch circuit 543, the main control device 261, the firing control device 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball lending operation unit (ball lending button 121 and a return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged beside the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other to receive a command for a ball lending operation by the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are directly rented to the upper plate 19 from a ball rental device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the drive of the launch device 60 is permitted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, that the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, that the player has touched the steering wheel 18 is detected by a sensor signal, and that the firing prohibition button 18 a ( (See FIG. 1) is not operated, the firing device 60 is driven, and the game ball is fired at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes a variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And The input port 527 is connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262. The CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531. The output port 529 is connected to the decorative design display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and analyzes the received command or performs a predetermined operation based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes the various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and its substance can be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the data.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an externally supplied 24 volt power supply, generates a +12 V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a +5 V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each of the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power interruption) has occurred when this voltage falls below 22 volts. The power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt process).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 543 is a circuit that captures a switch signal of the RAM erasure switch 323 and clears backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erasure switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasure switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasure signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including the power-on due to the blackout), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. You.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various types of counter information when playing a game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a hit random number counter C1 as a hit random number generation means used in a hit random determination of whether or not to generate a big hit state, and a type used in determining a big hit type (type lottery). A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not a reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, And the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and the second start winning device 33b. And a normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not to make it. The change selection counter C3 is also used for lottery of the reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and changed. The change type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for selecting a change pattern (selection of an effect pattern) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined by the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and the variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern are determined.

  Each time the counter C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, C4 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the upper limit, it is a loop counter that returns to 0, which is the lower limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area for storing respective values of a success / failure random number counter C1, a type determination counter C2, and a fluctuation selection counter C3, and a normal symbol random number counter C4. A fluctuation holding area is provided. The normal variable holding area includes four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) and one execution area. The values of the normal symbol random number counter C4 are stored in time series in each of the normal fluctuation holding areas in accordance with the history of game balls passing through the through gate 34. By employing this configuration, the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

  Further, the special fluctuation holding area includes eight holding areas (first to eighth holding areas) and one execution area. Each holding area of the special change holding area has a winning / failing random number counter C1, a type determination counter C2, and a change selection in accordance with a winning history of a game ball to the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. Each value of the counter C3 is stored in chronological order. In the present embodiment, the first variable display and the second variable display (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) can be held up to four times.

  To describe each counter in detail, the pass / fail random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 695, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 695) as a close value, 0 as a lower limit value as a start value. The configuration is returned to. Normally, when the pass / fail random counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the pass / fail random counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the pass / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 695), and is updated once every timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

  In the present embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the low probability state (the normal mode or the time reduction mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”. In the case of the state (probable change mode), the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20, and the value is “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two winning / failing determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot. , "7, 307" as a big hit value, and a second hit / failure judgment table storing "8-16, 308-316" as a big hit value.

  The type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and to reach an upper limit (that is, 19) and then return to 0 as a lower limit. In addition, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type corresponds to the value of the type determination counter C2 (in this example, the first start winning device 33a and the Regarding the jackpot corresponding to the entry of the ball into any one of the second start winning devices 33b, one type determination table is used in order to make the distribution of the jackpot type the same. Then, when a jackpot is won in the winning / decreasing lottery, the type of the jackpot state type given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (type lottery is performed), and the determined jackpot state is determined. Will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to reach an upper limit value (that is, 238) and then return to 0 as a lower limit value. In the present embodiment, the reach state of the decorative symbol is generated by the variation selection counter C3, and then the "reach out of front and rear reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol, and the reach state similarly occurs. The "reach other than front and rear departure" in which the rear final stop symbol is stopped other than before and after the reach symbol and the "complete departure" in which the reach state does not occur are determined by lottery. In the present embodiment, a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type in the ROM 502 is acquired when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. The first reach determination table referred to when the reach type is determined based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 (in the case of no big hit) and the entry of game balls into the second start winning device 33b as an opportunity. And a second reach determination table that is referred to when a reach type is determined based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 (in the case of no big hit). In the first reach determination table, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the out-of-order reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to reach other than the out-of-order reach, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete out of reach. On the other hand, in the second reach determination table, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the out-of-order reach, C3 = 2 to 11 corresponds to reach other than the out-of-order reach, and C3 = 12 to 238 corresponds to complete out of reach.

  The variation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the change selection counter C3 stored in the change selection counter buffer is stored in the special change holding area of the RAM 503. .

  In addition, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 59, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59) and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 37, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 37), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become. For example, the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough design variation modes are determined by the first variation type counter CS1, and the final stop symbol is generated after the reach occurs by the second variation type counter CS2. A finer pattern variation mode such as the elapsed time until the (in this example, the middle symbol) stops is determined. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of variation patterns. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. The buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative symbol display device 42 determines the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the pass / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter which is added, for example, one by one in a range of 0 to 232, and returns to an upper limit value (that is, 232, and then returns to a lower limit value of 0. Normal symbols). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the right or left through gate 34. The number of random numbers to be won in the ball state is 15, and the range is "1 to 15." On the other hand, the number of random numbers to be won in the high ball state is 232. The range is “1 to 232.” That is, in the present embodiment, the low entry pitch support determination table referred to in the low entry pitch support lottery in the low entry pitch state and the high entry state Ball entry support A high ball entry support determination table referred to in the selection is prepared, and when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is obtained, the variable display is performed on the ordinary symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time. After that, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("O" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second start winning device 33b is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in a 2 msec cycle in the present embodiment), and a stop signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of ".". For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process directly proceeds to the next process.

  If there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. In an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 and a prize ball is provided based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ). Further, upon outputting the winning ball command, the value of each winning ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, a random number initial value update process is performed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

  In step S303, a random number update process is performed. Specifically, each of the pass / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum values (695, 19, respectively in the present embodiment). , 238, 232) are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in a step S304, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning in the starting winning device 33, and in a step S305, a through gate passing process in accordance with the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the RAM 503, a first holding counter Na for counting the number of holdings of the first variable display triggered by a prize in the first startup prize device 33a, and a second holding counter Na in response to a prize in the second startup prize device 33b. A second hold counter Nb that counts the number of suspended variable displays, a total number of pending counts that counts the total number of suspended variable displays (the sum of the number of suspended first variable displays and the number of suspended second variable displays) A counter Nx is provided.

  In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area have a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the success / failure random number counter C1, a winning type random number storing area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and A reach random number storage area for storing a value is provided.

  Further, in the execution area of the special change holding area and each holding area, the first change display based on the ball entry into the first start winning device 33a or the ball entry into the second start winning device 33b is performed. A variable storage area in which information indicating whether the display is the second variable display is provided. Hereinafter, "the information indicating the first variable display is stored in the variable storage area" is also referred to as "the first variable flag is set ON", and "the second variable display is displayed in the variable storage area." Is stored "is also referred to as" the second variation flag is set ON ".

  First, in step S501, it is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than an upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the flow advances to step S503 to increment the second hold counter Nb and the total hold counter Nx by one.

  In subsequent step S504, each value of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number updating process in step S303 (the success / failure random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer). Each of the stored values) is stored in the first one of the vacant holding areas of the special fluctuation holding area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area). After step S504, the process moves to step S505.

  In step S505, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the success / failure determination processing will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. A type determination process for determining the type of is performed. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, if it is determined in step S505 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the value is deviated based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. A reach determination process for determining the type of reach at the time of fluctuation is performed. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, the details of the success / failure determination processing in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area matches one of the values “7” and “307” stored in the first success / failure determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “7” and “307” are values that will be a big hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is described in a simplified manner. However, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is “307”. If one of these determinations is affirmatively determined, the determination in step S5101 is affirmative. In the case where a negative determination is made also in the above, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first success / failure flag is turned on in step S5102, followed by terminating the present process. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value stored in the second success / failure determination table, “8 to 16, 308”. .. 316 ”is determined. By the way, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that will be a big hit only in the probability change mode. Note that, at the time of the determination process as well, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if “out of range” is obtained even in the high-probability state, the process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5104, followed by terminating the present process. In the present embodiment, a first success / failure flag and a second success / failure flag are not separately provided in addition to the success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success / failure random number counter C1. It is configured to store (overwrite) information on whether or not it will occur. In other words, for the sake of convenience of the description, storing the information in which the big hit state occurs in the hit random number storage area is referred to as setting the first hit flag and the second hit flag to ON.

  At this time, the value of the random number counter C1 is kept stored, for example, by separately providing a random number flag in addition to the random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1. In the variable display setting process performed at the time of starting, a configuration may be adopted in which a corresponding table is referred to based on the value of the random number counter C1 to determine whether or not it is appropriate.

  Next, the type determination processing in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether the first or second hit / fail flag has been set to ON in the hit / fail judgment process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit state), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility of a big hit state), then in step S5202 the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is referred to with reference to the type determination table. It is determined whether the value matches the value “0-9” corresponding to “15RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, followed by terminating the present process.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is set to the value “10” corresponding to “2RS” in step S5204 by referring to the type determination table. , 11 "is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5205, and the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5204, then in step S5206, the 15RN flag is turned on, and the process ends.

  Next, the second reach determination processing in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first determination flag has been set in the determination processing performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if the jackpot is a jackpot in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot state always occurs), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if the jackpot state does not occur at least in the low-probability state (there is a possibility of being missed), in step S5402, the reach determination table is referred to and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the change selection counter C3 stored in the special change reservation area matches one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “out-of-order reach”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, then in step S5403, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of out-of-front / rear reach is turned on, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, no separate front-back flag is provided in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3. Is stored (overwritten). In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting of the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front and rear flags.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, then in step S5404, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation reservation area corresponds to “reach other than the front and rear deviations” by referring to the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches any one of the values “2 to 11”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the flag other than before and after is turned on in step S5405, and this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if “variable departure” is reached, in which the variable display ends without going through the reach state, the present process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in a step S508 following the step S507, a setting process of a starting command is performed. In addition, in the first command, the fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) stored and held is triggered by the first start prize device 33a or the second start prize device 33b. And information indicating the results of the hit / fail determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing, and output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output processing (see step S201). .

  After the processing of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 by the first start winning switch 224a. Is determined based on the detection information. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the winning in the first startup winning device 33a is set to the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “4”) is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, where the first hold counter Na and the hold total counter Nx are incremented by one.

  In the following step S512, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in the vacant holding areas (the winning / failing random number storage area, the winning type random number storage area, the reach random number storage area) ). After step S512, control proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the success / failure determination processing have already been described above. That is, in the present embodiment, the hit / fail judgment processing based on the ball entry into the first start winning device 33a and the hit / non-judgment judgment processing based on the ball entry into the second start prize device 33b are common. In the case of the mode, the jackpot winning probability in the winning lottery is the same.

  In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Type determination processing for determining the type is performed. The details of the type determination processing have already been described above. That is, in the present embodiment, the type determination process based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the type determination process based on the ball entered into the second start winning device 33b are common. The type of the jackpot to be given is determined according to whether the jackpot is won in the winning / decreasing lottery based on the ball entering the prize device 33a or the case where the jackpot is won in the winning / decreasing lottery based on the ball entering the second starting prize device 33b. The distribution is the same.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation reservation area is newly stored. Based on the value of the selection counter C3, a first reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed.

  Here, the first reach determination processing in step S515 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first determination flag has been set in the determination processing performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is a jackpot in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot state always occurs), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot state does not occur at least in the low-probability state (there is a possibility of being missed), in step S5302, the reach determination table is referred to and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the change selection counter C3 stored in the special change reservation area matches one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “out-of-order reach”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303 a front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of out-of-front / rear reach is turned on, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, then in step S5304, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation reservation area corresponds to “reach other than the front and rear departure” with reference to the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches any one of the values “2 to 21”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, a flag other than before and after is set to on in step S5305, and this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the variable display ends "completely out of range" without going through the reach state, the process ends as it is.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after step S515, in step S516, processing for setting a starting command is performed, and this processing ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and thereafter, the hit determination process is performed. , The type determination process and the reach determination process are executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area (work area) for temporarily storing the value of the hit random number counter C1 or the like when the counter value is acquired is provided, and the information stored in the temporary storage area is determined by a hit determination process, After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the information is stored in the suspension area of the corresponding special fluctuation suspension area.

  The process of extracting the value of the random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 constitutes a determination value extraction process, and similarly stores the value of the random number counter C1 extracted in steps S504 and S512 in the special fluctuation holding area. The processing constitutes the determination value storage processing. The processing of determining whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 of step S505 and step S513 (step S5101, step S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes a first winning / failing determination process. The processing of storing (setting the corresponding flag) steps S5102 and S5104 constitutes a result storage processing.

  Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspended variable displays performed by the ordinary symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the ordinary holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the ordinary holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is obtained. Specifically, the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number updating process in step S303 is stored in the first of the free storage areas of the ordinary fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passage process ends.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power-off occurrence information setting, and the NMI interrupt process is executed. finish.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of a main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main process is started with a reset at the time of power-on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like) to become operable. The wait process is executed for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply 313 is pressed (ON). If the switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. I do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in subsequent step S104 whether or not power-off information has been set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the setting is not made, the backup data is not stored, so that the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power was turned off. That is, the validity of the backup is determined. If the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM (step S113 and the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup can be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). In addition, when the power-off information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (such as a checksum value), the process also proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 and the like). That is, in step S113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step S114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. After that, in step S111, interruption permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that the power-off occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the process at the time of power restoration (the process at the time of power-off restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S108, the information of the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

  In step S109, a command to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, in step S111, interruption permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing in steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S211 and S212 is executed in the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the settings of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the start winning device 33 and the like updated in the previous normal process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a decorative symbol in a variable manner, a variable pattern command, a symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the fluctuation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, and the like, determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, and the like) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and Is instructed to the display control device 45 to display (variable display) on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The fluctuation pattern command includes information for specifying the fluctuation type of the decorative symbol, such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variable display based on the variable pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and the sound.

  Here, the variation type of the decorative symbol will be described.

  “Normal reach” is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for the variation of the decorative pattern. Note that in the probable change mode and the time shortening mode, the variable display time is shorter than that in the normal mode even in various reach cases. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode, and “10 seconds” in the positive change mode and the time reduction mode.

  In the “super reach”, a character or the like is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby reaching a sense of expectation for the player. It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, three types of super reach, that is, super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach.

  "Premium Reach" is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs. During a decorative pattern change display (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative pattern, a character having a pattern different from the super reach, etc. Is displayed in the display pattern, and thereby, the reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. In the present embodiment, two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “2RS” is won, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with the chance symbol. However, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, a unique variable display is performed. (Change of chance) is performed. As an example of chance fluctuation, after the reach state occurs, if the reach is out of front and rear or out of reach other than before and after, the fluctuation is continued even after the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the medium symbol display area. Along with the effect, finally, a variable display in which “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas is performed.

  In addition, the variable display time for “completely deviating” that does not reach any of the reach states is set to “10 seconds” in the normal mode and “6 seconds” in the positive change mode and the time reduction mode.

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the elapse of the fluctuation time. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. The symbol combination is a combination of a probability variable jackpot symbol, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of chance symbols, a combination of front and rear deviating symbols, and a combination of symbols other than front and rear deviating symbols. The combination and the combination of completely deviated symbols are designated. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols is stored in a table in the sub control device 262. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops and displays the combination of the symbols corresponding to the symbol commands.

  If a winning is determined to be a probable jackpot ("15RS"; hereinafter also referred to as a "probable changing jackpot with balls") in which an increase in game balls can be expected, or a normal jackpot ("15RN" in which an increase in game balls can be expected) , Also referred to as “normal jackpot with payout”), the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays the decorative symbol with the number pattern in a combination that becomes a slot. In the present embodiment, in the case of “probable jackpot with payout”, the jackpot symbol, which is a combination of any one of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 odd-numbered zigzag symbols, or 2 , 4, 6, and 8, the variable display is stopped and displayed in either combination of the normal jackpot symbol, which is a combination of decorative symbols consisting of an even number of the zigzag pattern. In this case, the variable display is usually stopped and displayed with the combination of the big hit symbols.

  Then, when the sub control device 262 receives the symbol command of the winning with a variable winning jackpot, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the combinations of the symbols including any one of the first to ninth symbols as the stop symbol, and When the symbol command with the presence of the normal jackpot is received, one of the combinations of the symbols including any one of 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as the stop symbol.

  In addition, in the case where a winning is determined to be a probable jackpot (“2RS”; hereinafter, also referred to as a “probable jackpot without payout”) in which no increase in the number of gaming balls is expected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays “3” and “3” from the top. The combination of the chance symbols “4” and “1” is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, there is only one combination of chance symbols.

  The combination of the front and rear departure symbols corresponds to "front and rear departure reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of symbols other than front and rear deviations corresponds to "reach other than front and rear deviations" in which the final stop symbol stops at locations other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after a reach occurs. The combination of completely off symbols corresponds to "completely off" in which even reach does not occur. In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols that are out of front and back, the combination of symbols other than those that are out of front and back, and the combination of completely out of design are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, “missing” is displayed.

  As will be described in detail later, when the sub-control device 262 receives these out-of-design symbols, it determines the combination of the symbols stored in the corresponding counter buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. In the present embodiment, three commands are prepared for the release symbol command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one type of release symbol command. It is good also as composition which determines a combination.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. I do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the following step S203, the winning ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is performed. In this process, control regarding the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and at the same time, determination of a jackpot and setting of variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of the special display control processing will be described later.

  In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control processing will be described later.

  In step S207, a normal display control process is performed. In this process, the control related to the ordinary symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of the ordinary display control processing will be described later.

  In step S208, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed. Details of the start winning device control processing will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S209, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (4 msec in this example). ) Is determined. If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process shifts to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is repeatedly executed (Step S211, Step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

  In step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation can be similarly performed. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), it means that the power supply has been cut off, and the processing after step S213 is executed as the power failure processing when the power supply is cut off. Is In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To memorize.

  Then, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been turned off is transmitted to another control device (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S218, the RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  The processing in step S209 is performed when a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S208 is completed, or when one cycle of the processing in steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time is completed. It is executed at a certain timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503 a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. And can be easily stored. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited before storing the data (step S213), it is possible to prevent data from being changed when the power is turned off, and to reliably store the state before the power is turned off. .

  Next, the special display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current state is other than the big hit state by referring to a hit state storage area described later. In the “during big hit state”, the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R to when the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 This includes a round period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period after the last round until the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R can be started. .

  In the hit status storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state, and in the big hit state, “1” is set in the opening period and the interval period, “2” is set in the round period, "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not a big hit state is being performed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, when the game is in the state of the big hit, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S801, in step S802, By checking the setting status of the flag, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42). Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered that the variable display is being displayed, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is stopped and the variable display is stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is started, and the flag of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on. Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  Then, when a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, when neither the big hit state nor the fluctuation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S803, in which the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are entered. It is determined whether or not the value of the total number of holdings counter Nx for counting the total number of holdings of the variable display as a trigger is larger than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no change display is suspended, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one variable display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the held total counter Nx in step S804.

  In the following step S805, a process of shifting the data stored in the special change suspension area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved eighth area of the special fluctuation reserved area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted such as area → first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area, and so on. After step S805, in step S806, it is determined whether the first variation flag of the execution area is set to ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, that is, if the data corresponds to the first variable display based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S807. I do. In a succeeding step S808, a process of causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. After that, in step S809, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S806, that is, if the data corresponds to the second variable display based on the ball entry into the second starting winning device 33b, in step S810, the second hold counter Nb is set to 1 Is subtracted. In a succeeding step S811, a process of causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. After that, in step S809, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and the process ends.

  Here, the details of the variable display setting processing in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (probable change mode) by referring to a mode storage area described later in detail. The mode storage area stores determination information for determining the game mode. In the present embodiment, any one of “11”, “12”, and “21” is stored in the mode storage area, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12” is the time reduction mode. , And “21” corresponds to the probability change mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not “21” is stored in the mode storage area, thereby determining whether or not the state is in the high probability state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is the high probability state (probable change mode), in step S902, the first or second random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether any of the hit / fail flags (see the hit / fail judgment processing in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning / rejecting lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the vehicle is in the low probability state (normal mode or time reduction mode), in step S903, the first random flag is turned on with reference to the random number storage area. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the win / loss lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, a jackpot determination flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been determined is set to ON. In the present embodiment, storing the value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the big hit state in the hit random number storage area is referred to as setting the big hit determination flag to ON.

  In the following step S905, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag (see the type determination process in FIG. 15) is set to ON by taking into account the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, if “15RS”, a 15RS pattern setting process (a process of setting a fluctuation pattern command and a symbol command) is performed in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the occurrence of “15RS”, and a special process is performed based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The variation patterns (variable display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S906, the process moves to step S915 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S907 whether the 2RS flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, a 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S908. After step S908, the process moves to step S915.

  If a negative determination is made in step S907, a 15RN pattern setting process is performed in step S909. After step S909, control proceeds to step S915.

  When a negative determination is made in step S902 or S903, that is, when the jackpot is not won, in step S910, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (FIG. 16, refer to the reach determination process of FIG. 17). If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, if "reach out of front and rear", a front and rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S911, and the process proceeds to step S915.

  If a negative determination is made in step S910, in step S912, it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on, with reference to the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if “reach other than front and rear departure” is performed, a reach pattern setting process other than front and rear is performed in step S913, and the process proceeds to step S915.

  If a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if it is “completely out of range”, the process proceeds to step S914 after performing the outlier variation pattern setting process in step S914.

  In step S915, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is set to ON. This indicates that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43L and 43R is satisfied. In a succeeding step S916, a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is set. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to a variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of the normal process based on the setting of the special figure display timer, Switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262, which has received the fluctuation pattern command and the symbol command, starts the fluctuation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the fluctuation pattern command simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols based on the symbol command. After the end of step S916, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, a process of acquiring the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 and storing the value in the special fluctuation holding area, a success / failure determination process in steps S505 and 513, and a change display setting In the processing, a win / fail lottery is constituted by the processing of steps S901 to S903 for determining whether or not the win is based on the win / fail flag and the situation at that time. Also, the second determination processing is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting processing is configured by the processing of steps S906, S908, S909, S911, S913, S914, and the like.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when the determination in step S802 is affirmative, that is, when the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S812, in which the special figure display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed once, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer has become “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and the process ends. In the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal for performing the switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R based on the setting content of the switching display setting. As a result, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S814, and in step S815, stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 42R is output in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, stop display is performed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, separation, and the like. In addition, a control signal for performing the stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also output to the sub control device 262. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is reliably achieved. However, since the sub-control device 262 has already determined the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the symbol command or the variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is returned. Need not be added. In addition, again, the stop display by the special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display device 42 is merely an auxiliary one (for effect). I have.

  Subsequently, in step S816, after performing initial setting of the winning state and determination information setting processing for measuring the period of the time reduction mode, the processing ends. Here, the determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag is set to ON with reference to the hit / fail random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON by taking into account the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, that is, if it is a “15RS” or “15RN” jackpot, in step S1003, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable prize device 32 is opened) is determined. "15" is set in the round number counter for discrimination.

  In a succeeding step S1004, "1" is set to the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1005, a value “2000” corresponding to, for example, an opening period of 8 seconds is set in a special variable timer used for control during the winning state (open / close control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1006, “8” indicating the maximum number of eight balls per round is set in a prize counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize device 32. . The value of the winning counter is determined based on the detection information of the count switch 223 as to whether or not there is a ball in the variable winning device 32 during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). Is decremented by 1 when it is determined that there is an incoming ball.

  Then, in step S1007, an opening command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information on a hit type and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1007, this process ends.

  In addition, the effect of the promotion of the type of apparent jackpot in the jackpot state (for example, when the even-numbered eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, it is taught that "15RS" was won in the jackpot state immediately after. Alternatively, if the odd symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the user may be instructed to win "15RS" during the immediately following jackpot state).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, “2” is set in the round number counter in step S1008. After step S1008, in step S1009, "1" is set to the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1010, a value “500” corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 2 seconds is set in the special variable timer, and in step S1011 the winning counter is set to “8”. In step S1012, the opening Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1013 whether or not “12” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the mode is the time reduction mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1013, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1013, in step S1014, the value of the fluctuation counter is decremented by one in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the "15RN" jackpot state, the number of times of change display (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is set in the change number counter, and the special display is performed. Each time the variable display of the devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1014.

  In a succeeding step S1015, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1015, that is, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is still performed at the end of the hit state. If not, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1015, in step S1016, “11” indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed the specified number of times on the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1016, in a step S1017, a time-saving end command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time-saving mode is set, and then this processing is ended.

  Next, the variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1201, by determining whether or not the value set in the winning situation storage area is “0”, it is determined whether or not the state is other than the big hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the state is not a jackpot state, the present process is terminated as it is. By the way, at the start of the big hit state, “1” is set in the hit situation storage area in the above-described determination information setting processing.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the big hit state is in progress (if any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit situation storage area), the process moves to step S1202. , Subtract 1 from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000" or "500" is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether "1" is set in the hit situation storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "2" is set in the hit situation storage area in step S1205. In a succeeding step S1206, it is determined whether or not the payout is a big hit. Here, it is determined whether or not it is “15RS” or “15RN” which is a jackpot with a payout (whether or not it is other than “2RS”).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1207, a value “7500” corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for keeping the variable winning device 32 open is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1208, the value “100” corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set in the special variable timer. I do.

  After step S1207 or step S1208, in step S1209, processing for opening the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1210, a round command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of information to start a round is issued. Set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1211 whether "3" is set in the hit status storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the big hit state are finished and the ending period is started, “3” is set to the hit situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if it is not time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is decremented by one in step S1212.

  In a succeeding step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the flow shifts to step S1214 to set “1” in the hit status storage area. After that, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the payout is a jackpot.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, a value “1000” corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1216. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, in step S1217, a value “250” corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer.

  After step S1216 or S1217, in step S1218, the winning counter is set to “8”. Further, in step S1219, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1220, an interval command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of information to start an interval is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is a time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or the closed state of the variable winning device 32, the process proceeds to step S1221, and the variable It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for counting the number of balls entered into the winning device 32 is “0”. The winning counter is set to “8” which is the upper limit (specified number) of winnings per round at the start of the big hit state and at the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1221, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1221, that is, if the opportunity to end the round has come without waiting for the elapse of the set period of the round, the flow shifts to step S1212. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round ends immediately at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if all rounds in the big hit state have been completed, the flow shifts to step S1222 to set "3" in the hit situation storage area. After step S1222, in step S1223, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot with a payout. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1223, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1224. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1223, in step S1225, a value “250” corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer.

  After step S1224 or step S1225, in step S1226, "7" is set to the winning counter. When the processing for setting the ending after step S1222 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination in step S1221, the value of the winning counter is "0". If the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the beginning of the ending period, in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, an affirmative determination is immediately made in step S1221, and the ending period cannot be completed. For this reason, a temporary numerical value other than “0” (“7” in this example) is inserted into the winning counter in step S1226, thereby completing the ending period. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

  After step S1226, in step S1227, a process of closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in subsequent step S1228, an ending command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of information to start ending is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if it is time to end the big hit state after the ending period has ended, the flow shifts to step S1229 to perform an end setting process. In the end setting process, the setting of the mode storage area and the setting of the variation counter are performed.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the 15RN flag is set to ON with reference to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, a value “12” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the time reduction mode is provided after the big hit state ends.

  In a succeeding step S1403, “100” is set to the variation counter. It should be noted that the change number counter indicates the change display for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for grasping that. After step S1403, in step S1404, a time-saving start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1405. As a result, the probable change mode is provided after the big hit state ends. After step S1405, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, in step S1407, a probable change start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the probable change mode is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, in step S1408, a special start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the special probable change mode, which is a kind of the probable change mode, is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  It should be noted that the special probability change mode is the same as the probability change mode, and each numerical value such as the winning probability of the winning / failing lottery, the distribution rate of the jackpot type, the occurrence rate of the reach, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery, is the same as that of the probability changing mode. Only the effect contents (such as the ratio of the effect patterns to be selected) which are selected and determined by the side are partially changed, and the main control device 261 does not distinguish the special probable mode (it is simply treated as the probable mode). Further, regarding the processing after step S1405, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to determine whether or not the 15RS flag is set ON, and the winning type of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. With reference to the random number storage area, a determination may be made as to whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON, and a predetermined error process may be executed if a negative determination is made.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process in step S1229, in step S1230, “0” indicating that the state is not the big hit state is set in the hit status storage area. After that, in step S1231, a hit end command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of information to end the big hit state is set, and then the present process ends. Note that the hit end command includes information on the number of times of the fluctuation counter set in the end setting process.

  Next, the normal display control processing in step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a general symbol display flag indicating whether or not the variable symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is on. It should be noted that, when the flag for displaying ordinary symbols is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the ordinary hold counter Nc is 0, the present process is terminated as it is.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, when no variation display of the ordinary symbol is suspended, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2102, then in step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc.

  In a succeeding step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, and includes a first holding area → an execution area, a second holding area → The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as a reserved first area, a reserved third area → a reserved second area, a reserved fourth area → a reserved third area, and so on.

  After that, in step S2105, a normal symbol fluctuation setting process for setting and starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 41 is executed.

  Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, a normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol is being fluctuated and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set ON. In a succeeding step S2302, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored, that is, whether or not the current state is other than the big hit state, by referring to the hit situation storage area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if it is not a jackpot state, in step S2303, it is determined whether or not a value of “12” or “21” is stored in the mode storage area, It is determined whether or not the ball is in the entering state (time reduction mode or probable change mode).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the normal symbol display timer that measures the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to the variable symbol display time. "465" is set to 1.86 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the ordinary fluctuation holding area is “0”. In the high ball entry state, the winning is achieved when the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 232” is “1 to 232”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the second starting prize device 33b is won in the ball entry support lottery for opening or not, in step S2306, the player has won the ball entry support lottery. Set the entry support flag to indicate that this is the case. After step S2306, in step S2307, an opening confirmation command is set to the sub-control device 262 as opening schedule information for notifying that the second start winning device 33b has been determined to be in the open state. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, if the game is in a big hit state or a low ball entry state, in step S2308, the ordinary symbol display timer is set to display the variable display time of the ordinary symbol. Is set to "465" to make 1.86 seconds. Further, in step S2309, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the ordinary fluctuation holding area is “1 to 15”. In the low ball entry state, the winning is achieved when the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of “0 to 232” is “1 to 15”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2309, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2309, that is, if the player has won the ball entry support lottery, in step S2306, the player sets the ball entry support flag indicating that the player has won the ball entry support lottery, and sets in step S2307 After setting the release confirmation command in, the process is terminated. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, and the like can be appropriately set for each model of the pachinko machine, and for example, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in a high ball entry state is determined. Alternatively, it may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the low ball entry state.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2105, this processing ends. In addition, based on the setting in the ordinary symbol variation setting process, when a control signal to start the variation display is output to the ordinary symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the ordinary process, the ordinary symbol display device At 41, the variable display is started. As described above, the ordinary symbol display device 41 is configured to display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol, and if “O” is displayed, “X”, “X” If so, the display is switched (changed) to “○” and displayed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the variable display is being performed on the ordinary symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform a process of subtracting the ordinary symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed once, the count value of the general-purpose display timer is decremented by one.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S2107 to determine whether or not the count value of the general-purpose display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the flag for displaying the ordinary figure is turned off in step S2108, and in step S2109, the ordinary symbol display setting for performing the stop display on the ordinary symbol display device 41 is performed. Then, on the basis of the contents of the ordinary figure stop display setting, a control signal for performing a stop display on the ordinary symbol display device 41 is output in the next external output processing in the ordinary processing. In other words, when the winning is achieved (when the ball entry support flag is set to ON), the symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit for a few seconds), and when the winning is lost, the symbol "X" is displayed. The symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S2110 to perform a general-purpose discrimination information setting process, and ends the process. Here, the ordinary figure discrimination information setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402 a normal variable flag for determining whether the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set to ON.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not either “12, 21” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the open time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 5 with respect to the ordinary variable timer for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33b. Set “1450” to 8 seconds.

  Further, in step S2405, "3" is set in the opening number counter for counting the number of times (remaining number) of opening the second start winning device 33b so as to open the second start winning device 33b three times. After step S2405, in step S2408, the incoming ball support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag during the support period is turned on. Further, in step S2410, a setting for opening the second start winning device 33b is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2411, a support period start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 that the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set. Further, in step S2412, a blade opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 that the timing to open the second starting winning device 33b has arrived is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 5.7 seconds with respect to the ordinary variable timer. “1425” is set. Subsequently, in step S2407, "1" is set in the opening counter to open the second starting winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to the open state, and step S2411 is performed. In step S2412, a support period start command is set, and in step S2412, a blade release command is set.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is performed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display on the ordinary symbol display device 41 is output in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “○”, the display is switched to “x”, and if the current lighting is “x”, the display is switched to “○”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the starting winning device control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the flag during the support period is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2201, in step S2202, the value of the ordinary variable timer is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S2203, it is determined whether or not the ordinary variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the value of the ordinary variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the predetermined opening time of the second starting winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the flow shifts to step S2205 to set a blade closing command notifying the sub-control device 262 that it is time to close the second startup winning device 33b. . Thereafter, in step S2206, the ordinary variable flag is turned off. In a succeeding step S2207, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and in a step S2208, a setting for closing the second starting winning device 33b is performed.

  After that, in step S2209, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2209, the support period flag is turned off in step S2210. Further, in step S2211, a support period end command for notifying the sub-control device 262 that the period for opening the second start winning device 33b has ended is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, the winning ball entry support lottery has been performed in the probability change mode or the time reduction mode, and based on this, the second start winning device 33b is opened three times. If there is the remaining number of times, a value (for example, “250”) corresponding to the interval time is set in the ordinary variable timer in step S2212. After step S2212, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is an interval period during which the second startup winning device 33b is opened three times (the second startup winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2213. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2213, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2213, the ordinary variable flag is turned on in step S2214, and in step S2215, a value corresponding to the open time for the ordinary variable timer (in this example, during a high ball entry state; 1450 ", low ball entry state;" 1425 "), and in step S2216, the second start winning device 33b is set to the open state. After that, in step S2217, a blade release command is set, and the process ends.

  When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, and when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one) enter the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b is activated. May be configured to be immediately closed (for example, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, it is determined whether the second start winning switch 224b has been detected, and an affirmative determination is made. In this case, the process may proceed to step S2205.)

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interruption process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interruption process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily suspended, and a reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S3001, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored. The command reception flag is turned on, and the reception interruption processing ends. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by an interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received. If the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may shift to a command determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, a main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311. This main processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and an external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in subsequent step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power was turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to step S3115 and subsequent steps to initialize the RAM 513. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, an initial value of the RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the flow shifts to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (when power-off is restored) Process). That is, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored in step S3109, the information of the occurrence of the power cut is cleared in step S3110, and the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of the prize ball is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interruption is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the processing in step S3122 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power-off. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Then, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area. In step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a. In step S3127, the RAM determination value is calculated and the backup area 513a is calculated. And the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 513 to be backed up.

  In the process of step S3122, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than in the case where each process is in progress. Less and can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before the power is turned off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so that the state can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, a timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt processing is started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is obtained, and the command is determined (step S3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, in step S3301, it is determined whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from main controller 261 and the process ends. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  In steps S3304 to S3306, the type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not the command is a payout return command. In step S3306, whether or not the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not it is.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has been already turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S 3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S 3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout of the prize ball is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. Can be prevented from occurring. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be set reliably.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, this command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the clearing of the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) are performed while the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not performed when the winning ball remains. Although a bad effect is caused and a loss is given to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent a loss from being given to the player.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was turned off. A payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to permit the payout of the prize balls. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, the processing based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Be updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a winning ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received winning ball number is added to the total winning ball number and stored. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the winning ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the winning ball number corresponding to the command to the total winning ball number stored in a predetermined buffer area. And memorize. Since payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball commands transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball commands are payout instruction commands for instructing payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out earlier than the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, the processing based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Be updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO) nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor is it a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. Upon completion of the command determination processing, in step S3202, it is determined whether the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination processing. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout of payout balls before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, firing permission is set in the firing control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged with a ball, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state). .

  After that, in step S3205, the setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set. Executes the setting of the full tank release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (ball out state) or tank ball absence release state (ball presence state) is executed according to a change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball absence switch is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and the tank ball absence state and the tank ball absence state are set. Execute the settings.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a state to be notified such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the state is notified.

  Subsequently, a payout control process of the prize ball and the lending ball is executed. More specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to determine that the ball is not in a ball-pulling disabled state and that the ball-pulling operation is not started, and the payout motor is driven to execute ball-pulling processing. In a succeeding step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the start of the timer interrupt processing.

  Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, a port corresponding to a command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not a command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 includes a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all storage areas, the command is stored at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

  In the following step S3903, a pending information storage process for storing the information of the advanced command output from the main control device 261 in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is performed. The advance command includes, as described above, information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is a variable display triggered by a ball, and variable information corresponding to a jackpot. The information includes information indicating presence, information indicating a jackpot type, and information indicating a reach type.

  The holding information storage area of the sub-control device 262 includes eight holding areas (holding first to eighth holding areas) and one execution area, similarly to the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261. In the hold information storage area, according to the reception history of the preceding command, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the preceding command, the jackpot type, the reach type, and either the first variable display or the second variable display are provided. The information (variation information) on the variable display, such as information on whether the user is present, is stored in chronological order. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp not only the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the reservation area.

  Hereinafter, the suspension information storage processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, then in step S4102, a fluctuation suspension counter Nd that counts the number of suspensions of the fluctuation information that is suspended and stored in the suspension information storage area is incremented by one. Further, in step S4103, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advanced command, the jackpot type, the reach type, the information on whether the first variable display or the second variable display is supported, and the like are stored in the hold information storage area. Is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas.

  In a succeeding step S4104, a notice information storing process is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect display related to each other is intentionally derived in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform the continuous notice, and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the hold information storage area. In step S4103, the change information is stored in the newly stored holding area.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 49, reaches an upper limit value (ie, 49), and then returns to a lower limit value of 0. The continuous notice counter is updated periodically, and each time the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer).

  The notice type counter is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 9 and, after reaching an upper limit (that is, 9), returns to 0 as a lower limit. The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  Then, in the notice information storing process, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice is derived is provided in each of the hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice approval / disapproval determination table that is considered when determining whether or not to perform the continuous notice, and a notice table that is considered when determining the mode of the continuous notice. There are provided a plurality of advance notice propriety determination tables and advance notice tables, and the advance notice propriety decision table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the fluctuation information.

  After step S4104, in step S4105, it is determined whether the information newly stored in the reserved area corresponds to the first variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the unlit state is turned on. The first holding lamp 46a of this embodiment emits blue light.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4105, in step S4107, one of the second holding lamps 46b in the light-off state is turned on. The second holding lamp 46b of this embodiment emits red light.

  After step S4106 or step S4107, in step S4108, a continuous announcement lottery process for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement is performed. In the continuous announcement lottery process of step S4108, when the value of the fluctuation suspension counter Nd is “2” or more, the jackpot type and the reach are determined based on the value of the continuous announcement counter newly stored in the suspension information storage area. With reference to the notice approval / disapproval determination table corresponding to each type and game mode, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Further, when it is determined that the continuous announcement is to be performed, the announcement table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode is referred to based on the value of the announcement type counter newly stored in the hold information storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous advance flags of all the reserved areas in which the variation information is stored among the reserved areas in the reserved information storage area are turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

  In the present embodiment, after step S4108, in step S4109, a hold icon setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed. After step S4109, this process ends.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 as a display unit corresponding to the detection of an incoming ball is an image object imitating a “floating wheel”. ing. In the hold display area 462, up to eight hold icons 461 can be displayed. Further, the suspension icon 461 of the present embodiment includes a “final suspension icon 463” as a ball entry detection corresponding display indicating that the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is suspended, and a permanent suspension icon 463. There is a “temporary hold icon 464” as a precursor display that may be displayed as a previous stage.

  As the pattern of the mode of the reserve icon 463, the pattern of "the floating stripe pattern is blue", the pattern of "the floating stripe pattern is red", and the pattern of "the character A using the floating ring (of FIG. 43 (b) 463a) "and" Character B using floating ring (see 463b in FIG. 43 (c)) ". On the other hand, the tentative holding icon 464 is an image object in which the “floating ring” which is a basic mode of the main holding icon 463 is blurred (thinned). Note that the character A and the character B may each be of one type or a plurality of types.

  The display pattern of the hold icon 461 includes a pattern in which the book hold icon 463 is displayed immediately, and a display of the book hold icon 464 after the provisional hold icon 464 is displayed. (This pattern is also referred to as “via precursor”). Furthermore, as described later, the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is associated with the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot state (big hit expectation), and the display pattern of the hold icon 461 suggests the big hit expectation ( A pre-reading preliminary announcement effect is performed).

  Here, the hold icon setting process performed in step S4109 of the hold information storage process (see FIG. 35) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4301, the value of the icon lottery random number counter used when determining the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is acquired and stored in the hold icon information storage area of the corresponding hold area in the hold information storage area. The icon lottery random number counter is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, and reaches an upper limit (that is, 199) and then returns to 0 as a lower limit. . The icon lottery random number counter is updated periodically, and each time the value of the icon lottery random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. In step S4301, the value of the icon lottery random number counter is obtained from the counter buffer.

  Subsequently, in step S4302, a reference is made to the reserved icon pattern storage table that stores the correspondence between the value of the icon lottery random number counter and the display pattern of the reserved icon 461, and the icon lottery random number counter stored in the reserved icon information storage area is referred to. The display pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined based on the value.

  As shown in FIG. 39, a plurality of pending icon pattern storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, for the jackpot that is taken into account corresponding to the variation information that teaches the jackpot, and for the front and rear departure that is taken into account in response to the variation information that will be the front and rear departure reach, the reach other than the front and rear departure There is one for deviation other than before and after being taken into consideration corresponding to the variation information, and another (completely departure).

  Regarding the jackpot reserved icon pattern storage table, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 59”, it corresponds to “the blue-striped floating ring via the precursor (changed from the temporary reserved icon 464)” When the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “60 to 139”, it corresponds to “a red-striped floating ring via an aura”, and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “140 to 158”, the “aura” Corresponding to "Character A", the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "59", which corresponds to "Character B passing through the precursor", and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "160 to 179", the value of "via the precursor" If the value of the icon random determination random number counter is "180 to 199", it corresponds to "a red-striped floating wheel without a precursor."

  Regarding the pending icon pattern storage table for the front and rear departure, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 59”, it corresponds to “floating wheel of blue stripe pattern via aura”, and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “ If the value of the random number counter is "100 to 104", it corresponds to "Character A via the precursor", and the icon lottery corresponds to "60 to 99". When the value of the random number counter is “105 to 184”, it corresponds to “blue striped floating ring without aura”, and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “185 to 199”, “red without aura” "Striped float".

  Regarding the reserved icon pattern storage table for departure other than before and after, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 59”, it corresponds to “floating ring of blue stripe pattern via omen,” and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "60-89" corresponds to the "red-striped float through the omen", and the icon lottery random number counter value is "90-189", "blue-striped float without the omen" In the case where the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "190 to 199", this corresponds to "a red-striped floating ring without a precursor."

  Regarding the other reserved icon pattern storage tables, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 19”, it corresponds to “floating ring of blue stripe via aura” and the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “ The case of “20 to 199” corresponds to the “blue-striped floating ring without a precursor”.

  In other words, red-striped patterns have a higher expectation of jackpots than blue-striped patterns, and red-striped patterns are more likely to pass through auras. A and character B may be derived. In particular, when the character B is displayed, it can be grasped at that time that the big hit state occurs after the end of the corresponding variable display.

  Then, in step S4302, based on the various information stored in the reserved area of the reserved information storage area, the corresponding variation pattern of the variable display is determined, and the reserved icon pattern storage table to be referred to is determined according to the variation pattern. I do. Further, it is determined whether the value of the icon lottery random number counter is a value corresponding to the display pattern of any of the hold icons 461, and information indicating the display pattern of the hold icon 461 determined to correspond is displayed in the corresponding hold area. (The display pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined).

  If it is determined in step S4302 that the variation pattern corresponds to the jackpot, the display pattern of the hold icon 461 in which the character B is displayed in the hold area of the hold information storage area and the hold icon information storage area of the execution area Is confirmed or not, and if it is stored, refer to another (for example, for before / after) reserved icon pattern storage table instead of the jackpot reserved icon pattern storage table. May be configured.

  After step S4302, in step S4303, it is determined whether or not the hold icon 461 determined in step S4302 is a hold icon 461 via a precursor. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4303, in step S4304, the suspension change flag of the corresponding suspension area is set to on. The hold change flag indicates that the temporary hold icon 464 is going to change to the permanent hold icon 463. In the present embodiment, the hold change flag is set to ON and stored in the corresponding hold area. The temporary hold icon 464 is displayed in response to the changed information (in other words, the hold change flag indicates whether the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed). The hold change flag is provided in each hold area of the hold information storage area.

  After step S4304, or when a negative determination is made in step S4303, in step S4305, a hold icon display process is executed. Here, a process for additionally displaying the hold icon 461 (main hold icon 463 or temporary hold icon 464) determined in step S4302 on the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, regarding the hold icon 461, the first variable display based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the second variable display based on the ball entered into the second start winning device 33b. This is a common mode in which it is not specified which of the two-variable display corresponds. However, by confirming the variation specifying lamp 40 or confirming the transition of the lighting mode of the hold lamps 46a and 46b, it is possible to determine which of the start winning devices 33a and 33b is the variation display based on the ball entry. It is configured to be able to.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process shifts to step S3904 to determine whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from the time. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the flow shifts to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the flow shifts to step S3915.

  In step S3905, various counters are updated. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying the decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the large hit decoration symbol counter CO and the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting each of the off symbol of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR have a configuration in which register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is for determining a symbol (jackpot symbol) when the decoration symbol display device 42 stops changing when a jackpot state occurs. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is used as the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO. Has nine (0 to 8) counter values. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 8 and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

  Then, when a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probable jackpot is to be stopped is received from the main controller 261, for example, the counter value is set to 0 based on a table (not shown) (table for associating the counter value with the decorative symbol). If so, the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined, such as "1" (the slotted eye), and if it is "2" (the slotted eye). The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol buffer of the RAM 553. However, the counter value is not stored in the buffer but is referred to at a timing when the symbol command is received. It may be.

  When a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped is received, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, “2” (twisted number), and if the counter value is 2 to 4, “4” The combination of the jackpot symbols is determined such as (6) (5) and 6 (6) (7) and 7 and 8 (8) (7).

  Each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determines a combination of each of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / losing lottery is lost. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are updated at random by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of the addition exceeds the upper limit, the current value is determined by subtracting 8 from the value. . The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is determined by the reach symbol buffer, the reach symbol buffer other than the offset, and the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. It is stored in any of the off symbol buffers.

  Here, the updating process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, when the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the middle symbol counter CM is to be updated (YES in step S4002), the flow advances to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. If the lower symbol counter CR is updated (NO in steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update processing, and the update times of the respective counter values overlap. There is no. Thus, every time the update process is performed three times, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated.

  Then, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of the reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined that the combination is a reach symbol combination (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is determined whether or not the combination of the big hit symbols (the symbol in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol in the middle symbol display area are the same). Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the process ends without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, in step S4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of symbols that are out of front and rear. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols that are out of front and back (reach out of front and back) (S4008: YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. This is stored in the out-of-reach symbol buffer, and the process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front and rear deviations (reach other than front and rear deviations) (S4008: NO), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and rear departures, and the processing is terminated.

  When the combination is a combination other than the reach symbol (S4006: NO), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of the off symbol (completely off symbol). The combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at this time is stored in the completely missing symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and the process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3906, a suspension process is performed. Hereinafter, the suspension processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, in step S4202, the value of the fluctuation holding counter Nd is decremented by one.

  After step S4202, in step S4203, a process of shifting the data stored in the hold information storage area is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data (including flag information such as a continuous notice flag) stored in the first to eighth areas of the hold information storage area toward the execution area. The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as the first reserved area → the execution area, the second reserved area → the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area, and so on.

  In a succeeding step S4204, it is determined whether or not the command is a variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4204, in step S4205, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the lighting state is turned off. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4204, in step S4206, one of the second holding lamps 46b in the lighting state is turned off.

  After step S4205 or step S4206, in step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for the continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting processing of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery processing of step S4108) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is ON. Is not performed, and thus the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, it is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command whether the jackpot is a jackpot, what kind is a jackpot, and if not a jackpot, what is the reach type. The type of the continuous announcement is determined with reference to the corresponding tables. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at a desired timing when displaying the corresponding fluctuation.

  After step S4207, in step S4208, a process is performed to turn off any pending change flag that is set to on. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold change flag of the predetermined hold area is set to ON, the corresponding hold icon 461 is displayed in the form of the temporary hold icon 464. . That is, for example, the information (see FIG. 39 and the like) for displaying the abort icon 461 via the precursor is stored in the hold icon information storage area of the hold area, and the hold change flag of the hold area is turned on. In the case where there is, the temporary holding icon 464 is displayed as the holding icon 461 corresponding to the holding area, and when the holding change flag of the holding area is turned off, the holding is temporarily set as the holding icon 461 corresponding to the holding area. Instead of displaying the icon 464, the main hold icon 463 is displayed.

  In the following step S4209, a reserved icon shift process for shifting the reserved icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. That is, in the data shift processing in step S4203, the information related to the hold icon 461 is also shifted, so the hold area storing such information and the hold icon 461 in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 are displayed. In order to associate with the display location of, the re-drawing of the hold icon 461 is performed. Accordingly, in the hold display area 462, each time one variable display is consumed (executed), the hold icon 461 located on the leftmost side is deleted, and the hold icon 461 located on the right side thereof is deleted. Is shifted to the left by one (the display location moves). When the temporary holding icon 464 is displayed, when the holding icon 461 is shifted, the temporary holding icon 464 is changed to the final holding icon 463 (for example, in the holding display area 462, as shown in FIG. 43 (a) is derived from the mode of FIG. 43 (a) to the mode of FIG. 43 (b).

  After step S4209, this process ends. Note that in the present embodiment, the temporary hold icon 464 is configured to always change to the permanent hold icon 463 when one variable display is completed and the data shift process is performed. When the shift process is performed a plurality of times, the status may change to the main holding icon 463, or the main display may change to the main holding icon 463 not only at the timing of starting the variable display but also at the timing of the variable display. Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which a change to the main suspension icon 463 may be performed at the stage when the operation is shifted to the execution area.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3907, display setting processing is performed. Here, based on information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generation of a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the fluctuation type, the fluctuation time, the stop symbol, and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, control such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45 is performed.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts a decorative display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. It should be noted that once a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is operated in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses. Is continuously displayed.

  In addition, when the variable display is started, when the continuous advance flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous advance lottery process in step S4108) is on, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, With reference to the table corresponding to, the type of the continuous notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of a notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or Furthermore, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process of performing the effect control during the big hit (hit display process) is also performed.

  Here, the hit display processing performed in the display setting processing in step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether an opening command notifying the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702 a round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to “15RS” or “15RN” based on the information included in the opening command. If there is, “15” is set, and if “2RS”, “2” is set.

  After that, in step S4703, in the case of a jackpot with a payout, an opening effect for 8 seconds is set (image of the decorative design display device 42, sound of the speaker SP, lighting mode of various lamps), and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores a correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effect modes in the jackpot state, and refers to the table to determine a corresponding effect. Select it and let it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether a round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a payout with a jackpot, an effect during a round of up to 30 seconds is set, and then this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by one in step S4707, and if a large hit with a ball is hit in step S4708, the effect is set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this processing is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by one in step S4710, and if the hit is a big hit in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, followed by terminating the present process.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot without payout, in each of a period such as an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period (1 second). Rather than setting the effects separately, settings are made so that effects (announcements, etc.) are performed throughout the entire period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether a hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713 the ending display is immediately terminated, and setting is made to set the mode to the normal gaming state in which the variable display is performed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3908, the formal holding icon 463 may be displayed in the holding display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 (the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R may be held and stored). The pseudo-holding icon detection processing is performed to control the pseudo-holding ball detection corresponding display and the pseudo-holding icon 466 as the pseudo-winning mode, which are derived for performing the effect such as “No”.

  The pseudo-hold icon 466 has the same form as the above-mentioned temporary hold icon 464. Even if the pseudo-hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed in the hold display area 462, the pseudo-hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 466 are displayed. The icon 464 cannot be distinguished. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), a large number of pseudo-holding icons 466 and temporary holding icons 464 are provided in front of the pseudo-holding icons 466 and the temporary holding icons 464 together with the pseudo-holding icons 466 and 464. A bubble display 467 is displayed so that the bubbles keep rising. In the present embodiment, the bubble display 467 corresponds to the additional display.

  Here, the pseudo hold icon setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the false winning detection switch 445. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, in step S4502, a pseudo-random number used in the lottery to determine whether to display the pseudo-hold icon 466 and to displace the pseudo-wing member 431 to the functional position. Obtain the value of the counter CG. The pseudo lottery random number counter CG is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, reaches an upper limit value (ie, 29), and then returns to a lower limit value of 0. I have. The pseudo lottery random number counter CG is updated periodically, and the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is stored in the corresponding counter buffer each time. In step S4502, the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is obtained from the counter buffer.

  In a succeeding step S4503, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is any one of “0 to 9”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4503, it is determined in step S4504 whether or not the value of the pseudo random determination random number counter CG is any of "10 to 19". If a negative determination is made in step S4504, in step S4505, a pseudo permission flag used to determine whether or not to displace the pseudo blade member 431 to the function position (alone) is set to ON.

  After step S4505, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S4504, in step S4506, the value of the fluctuation suspension counter Nd that counts the number of suspensions of the fluctuation information stored in the suspension information storage area is “1”. As described above, it is determined whether or not it is less than “8” (whether or not it is “1 to 7”). If a negative determination is made in step S4506, that is, if no variable display is suspended or no more variable display can be suspended, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4506, a pseudo hold icon display process for displaying the pseudo hold icon 466 is performed in step S4507. In the pseudo hold icon display process, the number of change displays (change information) currently held is confirmed by the value of the change hold counter Nd, and the corresponding position (the game ball is next When it is detected by the second start winning switch 224b, the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed at the position where the corresponding hold icon 461 indicating the hold of the variable display is displayed. After step S4507, in step S4508, a pseudo hold flag indicating that the pseudo hold icon 466 is being displayed is set to ON, and the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4509 whether the pseudo hold flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4509, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4509, it is determined in step S4510 whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4510, a process of deleting the pseudo hold icon 466 is performed in step S4511, and in step S4512, the pseudo hold flag is turned off, and the process ends. That is, the pseudo hold icon 466 is deleted when the process of shifting the information in the hold information storage area (step S4203) is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4510, it is determined in step S4513 whether a preceding command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4513, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4513, a process of deleting the pseudo hold icon 466 is performed in step S4511. In step S4512, the pseudo hold flag is turned off, and the process ends. In this case, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold display area 462 is switched and displayed, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (d).

  That is, the pseudo-hold icon 466 of the present embodiment is immediately deleted when the variable display is newly held, even before the process of shifting the information in the hold information storage area is performed. Become. In this case, in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, a hold icon 461 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 466. However, when the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed as the hold icon 461, Since the appearance is the same as that of the pseudo hold icon 466, the appearance does not change.

  On the other hand, when the real hold icon 463 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 466 (when the display pattern of the hold icon 461 without a precursor is selected), the mode of the hold display area 462 is, for example, The display is switched from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) or FIG. 43 (c). Note that the same switching display mode is used when the temporary holding icon 464 changes to the permanent holding icon 463.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3909, a pseudo blade opening control process for controlling the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 provided in the second starting winning device 33b is performed. Hereinafter, the pseudo blade opening control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not a blade closing command (see step S2205 in FIG. 27) output from main controller 261 has been received at the timing when blade member 37 in the open position is displaced to the closed position. I do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4601, a process of displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position is performed in step S4602, and this process ends. The pseudo blade member 431 controlled by the sub-control device 262 is controlled by the main control device 261 so as to be synchronized with the blade member 37 displaced from the open position to the closed position. It is displaced from the functional position to the standby position.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4601, in step S4603, the blade opening command (step in FIG. 26) output from the main control device 261 at the timing when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position. S2412, see step S2217 in FIG. 27). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4603, in step S4604, a process of displacing the pseudo wing member 431 to the functional position is performed, and this process ends. By performing this process, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced from the standby position to the functional position so as to be synchronized with the blade member 37 displaced from the closed position to the open position.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4603, in step S4605, is an open confirmation command (see step S2307 in FIG. 25) output from the main control device 261 received at the timing of winning in the ball entry support lottery? Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4605, in step S4606, an independent operation invalid flag that prohibits the pseudo blade member 431 from operating alone is set to ON.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4605, in step S4607, at the timing when a series of opening / closing processing of the second startup winning device 33b (the blade member 37) performed by winning in the ball entry support lottery ends. It is determined whether or not the support period end command (see step S2211 in FIG. 27) output from main controller 261 has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4607, the single operation invalidation flag is turned off in step S4608.

  After step S4608 or S4606, or when a negative determination is made in step S4607, in step S4609 the pseudo blade member 431 is in a state of being independently displaced to the functional position (the blade member 37 is in the closed position). It is determined whether or not the pseudo release flag indicating that the flag is ON is set to ON.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4609, a pseudo permission flag that is set to ON at a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected in step S4610. It is determined whether or not (see step S4505 in FIG. 40) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S4610, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4610, it is determined in step S4611 whether the single operation invalidation flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4611, a determination is made in step S4612 as to whether or not a big hit state is occurring.

  If a negative determination is also made in step S4612, the pseudo open flag is set to on in step S4613. In subsequent step S4614, a value corresponding to the time for which the pseudo blade member 431 is kept in the functional position is set in the pseudo opening timer used for controlling the opening and closing of the pseudo blade member 431. Further, in step S4615, a process of displacing the pseudo wing member 431 to the functional position is performed. After that, in step S4616, the pseudo permission flag is turned off, and the process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4611 or step S4612, the process skips steps S4613 to S4615 and proceeds to step S4616. That is, when a series of opening / closing control for opening the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed, or during the big hit state, the pseudo blade member 431 alone is controlled by the pseudo blade opening control process. The operation is configured not to be performed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4609, it is determined in step S4617 whether or not the single operation invalid flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4617, in step S4618, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo open timer is performed.

  In a succeeding step S4619, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo release timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4619, that is, if the timing for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position has not yet arrived, the present process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4619, the pseudo open flag is turned off in step S4620, the pseudo open timer is reset in step S4621, and the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the standby position in step S4622. After performing the processing, the processing ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4617, step S4618 and step S4619 are skipped, and the flow shifts to step S4620. That is, in the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the pseudo blade is set so as to cover the moving blade member 37 and the front of the blade member 37 displaced to the open position. The member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position. Further, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced from the functional position to the standby position so as to cover the front of the moving blade member 37. It is configured. Therefore, when displacing the blade member 37 to the open position, it is inconvenient if the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. Therefore, prior to displacing the blade member 37 to the open position, the timing at which it is determined that the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position (output from the main controller 261 when the ball entry support lottery is won). If the pseudo-blade member 431 is in the functional position at the timing when the release confirmation command is received and the single operation invalidation flag is turned on), the pseudo-blade member 431 is returned to the standby position.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3910, in the hit state with a payout, using the pseudo blade member 431 and the effect button 125, a pseudo blade effect for indicating whether or not to be promoted to a probable big hit is performed. A blade effect process is performed. Hereinafter, the pseudo blade effect processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the payout is in a jackpot. If a negative determination is made in step S4801, the process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been taught that it is a probability change big hit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4803, then in step S4804, a large hit pseudo open lottery is performed to determine whether to set the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position. Here, a corresponding random number counter, and a table for storing the correspondence between the random number counter and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 are used. In the table, there are those that are referred to at the time of the probability change jackpot and those that are usually referred to at the time of the jackpot.

  Usually, the table referred to at the time of the big hit is a small displacement pattern (for example, 35%) for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position side by about 40 degrees and a large displacement pattern (for example, 5%) for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position. ) And a non-displaced pattern (for example, 60%). On the other hand, the table referred to at the time of the probability change jackpot is such that the small displacement pattern (for example, 45%), the large displacement pattern (for example, 10%), the pattern that does not displace (for example, 40%), and the promotion effect to the probability change jackpot are determined. It is set so as to be assigned to a pattern (for example, 5%).

  Subsequently, in step S4805, a process corresponding to the result of the big hit pseudo open lottery is executed. That is, when the small displacement pattern or the large displacement pattern is selected, a process for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position side and returning to the standby position after a predetermined time is executed. In addition, when the fixed pattern is selected, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position side, and the process for returning to the standby position after a predetermined time, the process for starting the promotion effect, and the probable big hit. Is stored (the corresponding flag is set to a default state). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured such that the teaching about the winning of the probability change jackpot (15 RS) with the presence of a ball is always performed at least until the corresponding jackpot state ends at the latest. Have been.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3911, a lighting pattern of lamps and electric decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the audio setting process of step S3912, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device. If a command related to voice, such as notification of an error occurrence, has been transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3912.

  In step S <b> 3913, control setting of a customer waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display which is set to be displayed after a predetermined time elapses while the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performed; energy saving mode) and the like Is performed.

  In step S3914, an external output process of transmitting a control signal based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3914 to each device is executed. For example, the display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3914 performed every 2 msec, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process shifts to step S3915 to determine whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Is determined. The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

  If power-off information is not stored, the process advances to step S3916 to determine whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 has not been destroyed, the process returns to step S3901, and the normal process is repeatedly performed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3915 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3917. In the power-off processing, the generation of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After the power-off processing is performed, the processing is in an infinite loop.

  As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the first start winning unit 33a and the second start winning unit 33b are unitized as the start winning unit 401, and the start winning unit 401 includes the first start winning unit 33a. Further, a front decoration section 403 that covers the front of the second start winning device 33b collectively is provided. For this reason, the visibility of the game ball moving around the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is relatively reduced, and as a result, the game ball is moved to the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33a. It becomes difficult to understand which of the devices 33b has entered the ball. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even in the low ball entry state, the second starting winning device 33b is relatively easily opened, and while the game ball is being fired, the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Is not performed, the time period in which the player easily feels stress is configured to decrease, and the player only needs to enter the game ball on the back side of the front decoration unit 403 to play the game. The ball can enter one of the first starting prize device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b, and the game can be advanced as if a winning / non-prize lottery was received. In other words, even if the ball entry rate of the game balls into the first start winning device 33a is low, if the game balls enter the second start winning device 33b relatively easily, the winning / rejecting lottery is constantly received. Therefore, there is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it is difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball has entered the first starting prize device 33a or the second starting prize device 33b. In addition, the user does not care whether the game ball easily enters the first start winning device 33a. As a result, even if the ease with which a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression due to that.

  Also, as a matter of course, if the blade member 37 is in the closed position, it is not possible to cause the second starting winning device 33b to enter a game ball. For this reason, the player who has recognized that the blade member 37 is at the closed position shifts his / her eyes to the first starting winning device 33a and observes whether or not the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a. Tends to.

  In this regard, in this regard, in the present embodiment, a functional position that is disposed in front of the blade member 37 and can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the open position, and a standby position that can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position. A pseudo ball member 431 that can be displaced between the positions is provided. When the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, a game ball passes through a game area behind the pseudo blade member 431. It is configured to be possible.

  That is, even if it is not the timing for opening the second start winning device 33b (displacing the blade member 37 to the open position), by displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position, it is as if the blade member 37 The pseudo vane opening mode as if it were at the open position is derived. This can increase the chance that a predetermined action related to the blade member 37 occurs from the visual recognition mode in which the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state. Therefore, if the player is interested in opening the second start winning device 33b, it recognizes that some action has occurred in the second start winning device 33b in the closed state. It is also conceivable to turn the gaze to the second start winning device 33b to determine whether the device 33b has been opened. However, in actuality, there may be a pseudo-blade opening mode (operation of only the pseudo-blade member 431), and the pseudo-blade opening mode is a mode as if the blade member 37 is in the open position. Therefore, with respect to the second starting winning device 33b, simply looking at or entering the end of the field of sight indicates whether the blade member 37 is in the open position or only the pseudo blade opening mode is derived. It is difficult to distinguish whether the blade member 37 is at the closed position or the blade member 37 is mistaken (for a moment) as having been displaced to the open position.

  As described above, the pseudo blade opening mode is merely to make it appear as if the blade member 37 has been opened. With this, the blade member 37 appears to be opened. When there is no sign that a game ball has entered, the state of entry of the game ball by the second start winning device 33b does not always match the appearance of the second start winning device 33b. Then, when the pseudo blade opening mode is repeated to some extent, if the game ball constantly enters the second start winning device 33b and the like and there is no delay in the game (the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device). Unless a disadvantageous game is forced due to the total entry of the game ball into the device 33b), the user does not care much about whether the blade member 37 is opened. You can reach your heart. As a result, even if the ease with which the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a is reduced, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to that is more enhanced. It will be played more.

  Further, by the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing when the second starting winning device 33b is opened (or closed). Therefore, an advanced player who can perform a game such that the second start winning device 33b is opened and a game ball is fired only at a timing at which the game ball can enter, and a beginner player It is possible to suppress a situation where the disparity is widened.

  Further, using the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to perform an effect involving the opening and closing of the blade member 37 and an effect merely as a lively event regardless of the opening and closing of the blade member 37. In addition, during the progress of the game, the pseudo feather opening mode becomes a part of the game scenery, and the game becomes an accent / buzz or a rhythm (it feels lonely when it disappears), which can enhance the interest.

  Furthermore, by deriving the pseudo blade opening mode using the pseudo blade member 431, the pseudo blade opening mode can be made more realistic. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo blade opening means imitating the mode of the blade member 37 behind the blade member 37, but in this case, the pseudo blade opening means is disposed relatively behind. However, there is a concern that the pseudo blade opening means may be difficult to see even if the pseudo blade opening means is in the pseudo blade opening mode. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball passes in front of the pseudo blade opening means in the pseudo blade opening mode. As a result, there is a possibility that it is instantaneously grasped that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this regard, by providing the pseudo blade member 431 in front of the blade member 37, the above concern can be eliminated.

  In addition, since the pseudo blade member 431 can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member 37 is kept in the closed position, the pseudo starting member 33b can be simulated without inadvertently entering game balls into the second starting winning device 33b. A mode in which the blade member 431 operates (a mode in which the whale moves the forelimbs, a mode in which the second starting winning device 33b opens (slightly) opens and closes, etc.) can be sufficiently used for production and the like.

  In particular, when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position so as to cover the front of the blade member 37. Have been. Further, when the blade member 37 at the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position so as to cover the front of the blade member 37. Have been. For this reason, when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the blade member 37 is viewed from the front, and when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. Can be the same as when viewed from the front (in both cases, the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is visually recognized). Further, the blade member 37 being displaced is also covered with the pseudo blade member 431, so that it is difficult to understand that the blade member 37 has been displaced. Therefore, the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode can be further enhanced.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the front side of the blade member 37 is not directly exposed to the front, it is not necessary to make the front side of the blade member 37 the same as that of the pseudo blade member 431. For example, it is not necessary to perform a process such as drawing a figure (in this example, it is not necessary to form a shape imitating the forelimb of a whale). For this reason, the configuration of the blade member 37 can be simplified, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member 37, the figure or the like rubs against the pseudo blade member 431, and the design It is possible to prevent the property from being deteriorated.

  Further, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and a pseudo shaft connected to the pseudo blade member 431 is provided inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 connected to the blade member 37. 433 is inserted. Thereby, the rotation axes of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 can be extended on the same straight line. Therefore, the operation of the blade member 37 and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 can be relatively easily synchronized. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member 37 is being displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member 37, so that the front of the blade member 37 is further moved. Can be reliably covered. Therefore, operational effects such as making the location of the blade member 37 difficult to understand can be further achieved.

  In addition, the blade member 37 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and the upper surface (guide surface) of the blade member 37 in the open position is located below the upper side of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. This also makes it difficult for the blade member 37 to be visually recognized (it is difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member 37). Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further achieved.

  The provision of the front decoration portion 403 can enhance the sense of unity of the peripheral portions of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. For this reason, if the game ball is launched aiming at the front decoration part 403, a relatively easy-to-understand visual image that the ball is entered into one of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. Can be. In addition, more dynamic decoration and the like can be performed in the front decoration portion 403 that covers the first startup winning device 33a and the second startup winning device 33b collectively, and the design can be improved.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the front decoration unit 403 includes the character display unit 441 that models a whale excluding the forelimbs, and the pseudo wing member 431 is formed by imitating the forelimb of a whale. Then, the pseudo wing member 431 is displaced to the functional position, so that the whole image of the whale emerges. For this reason, the player's interest in reducing the visibility of the back side of the front decorative portion 403 and the state in which the game balls enter the starting winning devices 33a and 33b while attracting the gaze to the whale mode in which the forelimbs move. Can be reduced. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease with which the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a is further enhanced.

  Further, the front of the blade member 37 at the closed position is configured to be covered by the character display unit 441 of the front decoration unit 403. For this reason, it becomes more difficult to determine whether the pseudo blade opening mode is only derived or whether the blade member 37 is really in the open position (whether the blade member 37 is in the closed position). By providing the pseudo-blade member 431, the effect of deriving the effect that the second starting winning device 33b may have been opened may be further enhanced.

  In addition, the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position has its tip located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403. This makes it easy to recognize that the pseudo blade member 431 has been displaced to the functional position. Therefore, while the operation of the blade member 37 is hidden as much as possible, the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 is positively appealed, so that the user can enjoy a change in the visual recognition mode in the start winning unit 401 or the pseudo blade member The effect performed using the operation of 431 (pseudo-feather effect processing or the like) can be made easier to understand.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing control of the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b (start winning device control process) is executed by the main controller 261 and the opening and closing control of the pseudo blade member 431 (the pseudo blade opening control process). , Pseudo-blade effect processing) is configured to be executed by the sub-control device 262. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load of the main control device 261 and the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prior to the process of displacing the blade member 37 to the open position (step S2410 and the like), the main controller 261 issues an open confirmation command (step S2410) indicating that the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position. S2307) is output to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 is configured to, when receiving the release confirmation command, displace the dummy blade member 431 to the standby position (step S4604). For this reason, when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 is already in the functional position, so that the blade member 37 in the middle of the displacement cannot be covered with the pseudo blade member 431. Can be avoided.

  In addition, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to have a larger front surface area than the blade member 37, and when the blade member 37 is in the open position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, the closed position of the blade member 37 is set. The side of the dummy blade member 431 on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position than the side surface. Further, when the blade member 37 is at the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is at the standby position, the side of the pseudo blade member 431 on the functional position side is closer than the surface of the blade member 37 on the open position side. , Located on the open position side. That is, the blade member 37 is controlled by the main control device 261 and the pseudo blade member 431 is controlled by the sub-control device 262. Therefore, the operation start timing of the blade member 37 and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member 431 slightly differ. May shift. In this regard, by configuring the operation direction side of the previously operable blade member 37 so as to be extraly covered with the pseudo blade member 431, even if the blade member 37 is displaced slightly ahead of time, the pseudo blade member 431 can be used. It will fall within the covered area. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether or not the blade member 37 is displaced, or to prevent the operation of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 from deteriorating in design quality due to deviation. can do.

  In this embodiment, when the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are detected, the corresponding holding lamp 46a or 46b is turned on, and the decorative symbol display device is turned on. In the 42 hold display area 462, a hold icon 461 is displayed. For this reason, even if the player does not directly look at the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, the player can visually recognize the hold icon 461 and the like to play the game on the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. It is possible (or rather easy) to know that the ball has entered and the right to win or not has been obtained. Therefore, the chance of directly visually recognizing the start winning devices 33a and 33b is reduced, and even if the ball entry rate to the first start winning device 33a is relatively low, the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b are not affected. If the overall ball entry rate is not low, the player may be in a situation where the player does not care whether the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. (It does not fall into the situation where the first start winning device 33a is eyed). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress a situation in which amusement balls do not easily enter the first start winning device 33a, thereby causing a decrease in interest. On the other hand, even if the appearance of the game ball entering the first start prize switch 224a and the second start prize switch 224b becomes slightly invisible, whether or not the ball has entered is firmly determined by the hold icon 461 or the like. , It is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Further, a pseudo winning detection switch 445 capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area (an inner area of the start winning unit 401) is provided in a covered area of the game area whose front is covered by the front decoration unit 403. Have been. In the present embodiment, when the false winning detection switch 445 is detected, the decoration symbol display device 42 is different from the holding icon 461 (the holding icon 463) imitating the holding icon 461 (the holding icon 463). The pseudo hold icon 466 of the mode is configured to be able to be derived. In addition, when the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is detected, before the main hold icon 463 corresponding to the detection is derived, the temporary hold icon 466 has the same mode as the pseudo hold icon 466. It is configured that the hold icon 464 may be derived. For this reason, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, it is possible to perform an effect such as that the game ball that has entered the covered area (start winning unit 401) may have entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the production opportunity and the type of production, and it is possible to diversify the production. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo blade opening mode (the effect of whether the game ball has entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b), and to improve the interest.

  Further, the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are displayed with a blurred display of the main hold icon 463, and are derived with a dynamic bubble display 467 displayed so as to overlap the front thereof. For this reason, it can be surely recognized that the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are not the main hold icon 463. Therefore, for example, if the pseudo-hold icon 466 and the temporary-hold icon 464 are different from the final-hold icon 463, they may be different from each other. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the user assumes the pseudo hold icon 466 to be the main hold icon 463 to the last and gives rise to mistrust.

  It should be noted that the mode of the book-hold icon 463 is determined based on the content of the corresponding variable display, so that the book-hold icon 463 can be more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the interest in the effect of whether or not the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 become the main hold icon 463.

  In addition, the false winning detection switch 445 is electrically connected to the sub control device 262. Therefore, by reducing the number of information input to the main control device 261 and the number of components for inputting information to the main control device 261 as much as possible, the control load on the main control device 261 can be reduced, and Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the false winning detection switch 445 is detected, the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) hold less than eight variable displays, In other words, unless the detection by the start winning switches 224a and 224b is in a valid state as a trigger of the winning / losing lottery, the pseudo hold icon 466 corresponding to the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is not newly displayed (step). See S4506). Therefore, in a state where the temporary hold icon 464 and the final hold icon 463 should not be displayed, the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed, so that the pseudo hold icon 466 is clearly recognized. Can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the apparent pseudo-hold icon 466 is unnecessarily derived and the interest is reduced.

  Further, in a covered area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the front decoration portion 403, a guide stand for guiding the game ball to the pseudo winning detection switch 445 at a position downstream of the second starting winning device 33b. 446 are provided. Further, a guide nail 448 that changes the traveling direction of the game ball (in this example, guides toward the guide base 446) is provided at a position adjacent to and below the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position.

  For example, if the game ball enters the covered area and the blade member 37 is in the open position, the game ball reaches the guide point guided by the blade member 37 to the ball receiving portion 405 of the second starting winning device 33b. Also, when the blade member 37 is at the closed position, the game ball naturally flows down the game area without being guided by the blade member 37 and is discharged to the outside of the covering area. At this time, when the trajectory of the game ball incident on the covered area and the trajectory of the game ball after being ejected from the covered area extend substantially in a straight line, the game ball incident on the covered area just before is the first starting prize. Without entering the device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, it is immediately recognized as having been discharged from the covered area.

  In this regard, as described above, since the guide table 446 and the guide nail 448 are provided, the advancing direction of the game ball changes in the covered area, and the advancing speed of the game ball is delayed. It is difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering. Therefore, it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to a place where it is easily visible, and the game ball is placed in the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning. It is possible to create more situations in which the player may have entered the device 33b or may not have entered the device 33b.

  In particular, by visually recognizing the reserved display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, it is possible to know whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. Since the various effects relating to the game are performed, the holding of the decorative symbol display device 42 is more convenient than the first starting prize device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b being directly visually checked to determine whether or not the game ball has entered. With the icon 461, the game can be easily shifted to a game mode in which a ball is entered into the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. For this reason, by visually recognizing that a game ball does not readily enter the first starting winning device 33a, it is possible to suppress the player from being unable to concentrate on the effect and from accumulating stress.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the above embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

  (A: Shape and Design of Front Decoration) In the above embodiment, the front decoration 403 is formed in a substantially disc shape. However, the shape and design of the front decoration 403 are different for each model of the pachinko machine 10. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a portion that covers the first start winning device 33a and a portion that covers the second start winning device 33b may be configured as separate bodies (separate bodies may be combined). However, those formed separately may be arranged adjacently). Further, for example, a configuration may be made such that “rocky reef” is drawn on the front decoration part 403 and “fish school” is drawn on the pseudo feather member 431. Note that the design of the front decoration portion 403 and the design of the pseudo-blade member 431 may not be related at all.

  Furthermore, for example, the front decoration unit 403 may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of success / failure lottery, etc.). In addition, the front decoration unit 403 is taught that the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are present, or the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided. A display may be provided to teach the position of the game ball, or to teach that the position aimed at the game ball is here. In other words, since the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are unitized and become slightly incomprehensible, there is a concern that the player may be confused as to where to launch the game ball. By performing the display, such a concern can be suppressed. In addition, when it is difficult to understand only by the display guidance in the front decoration unit 403, guidance display is also performed in other parts (for example, a display in which the normal display is not changed from the demonstration display screen on the decoration design display device 42). In such a case, a display for guiding the target position of the game ball is performed on the display screen. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the front decoration unit 403 is configured to be transparent or translucent by forming the front decoration unit 403 to have transparency. Alternatively, a plurality of slits or holes may be formed to provide transparency.

  Further, in the front decorative portion 403 (character display portion 441), an index portion is provided to serve as a reference for determining whether the distance between the nails of the pair of right and left nails 406 is large or small. You may comprise. For example, as shown in FIG. 50, of the whale that is the character display unit 441, the two divided ends of the tail 701 located near the life nail 406 are each sharpened, and each of the ends is a pair of life nails. You may comprise so that it may be arrange | positioned directly under 406. In this case, a portion of the tail 701 of the whale in which the distance between the tip portions is almost the same as the distance between the life nails 406 constitutes the index portion.

  In this case, by comparing the pair of left and right life nails 406 with the whale tail 701, it is possible to accurately and quickly determine whether the distance between the life nails 406 is widened or narrowed. . Therefore, the appropriate position of (the head of) the nail 406 can be instantaneously grasped, and it can be relatively determined whether or not the nail 406 needs maintenance, or the player can When the distance between the life nails 406 is narrower than that of the whale tail 701, it is possible to avoid a game so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. As a result, the distance between the life nails 406 can be made as constant as possible, and the variation in pachinko machine 10 between the pachinko machines 10 can be reduced with respect to the ease with which game balls enter the first starting winning device 33a. . In particular, since the index portion (whale tail 701) is provided in the front decoration portion 403, it is close to the tip (head) of the life nail 406, and thus, the inclination of the life nail 406 can be grasped more reliably. can do.

  The form of the indicator is not particularly limited. For example, an indicator having the same width as that between the pair of life nails 406 may be provided immediately below the pair of life nails 406. An index portion may be provided directly below the nail 406 so as to indicate the position of each game nail 406, or the index portion is not formed by the character display portion 441 or the like, but is formed by the shape of the front decoration portion 403. A part may be configured. Further, the pseudo blade member 431 and the blade member 37 may be provided with an indicator.

  The shape and the like of the base plate 402 of the start winning unit 401 are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the slider 411 may be omitted. Further, the ball receiving section 405 can be configured separately from the front decoration section 403.

  (B: Object Covered by Front Decoration) In the above embodiment, the front decoration 403 is configured to collectively cover the front of the first startup winning device 33a and the second startup winning device 33b. Only the front portion may be covered, or other winning devices (variable winning devices 32) and the like may be covered. In the above-described embodiment, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are arranged vertically, but the arrangement is not particularly limited. May be. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first start winning device 33a is configured so that a game ball can always enter, and the second start winning device 33b can be set in an open state in which a game ball can enter, and in a non-enterable state. Although the state is configured to change between the closed state and the closed state, for example, both may be such that the game ball can always enter, or both may be changed between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the front decorative portion 403 may be configured to cover the front and upper portions of the pair of right and left life nails 406. In this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize how the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. Accordingly, the determination that the game ball has entered the first start winning device 33a is based on various matters derived as a result of the game ball having entered the first start winning device 33a (such as the display of the hold icon 461). And let them go. As a result, it is possible to further promote a game that is not particular about the pace at which game balls enter the first start winning device 33a. When this configuration is adopted, the length of the nail 406 protruding from the front surface of the game board 30 is shortened to prevent interference between the life nail 406 and the front decoration part 403, or On the other hand, a nail hole for inserting the life nail 406 may be formed.

  (C; Operation of Pseudo-Blade Member, etc.) In the above embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the middle of the open position or the displacement, the front thereof is covered by the pseudo-blade member 431. The configuration may be such that a state where the pseudo blade member 431 is at the standby position while the blade member 37 is at the open position can occur.

  Further, the effect using the pseudo blade member 431 and the trigger for operating the pseudo blade member 431 are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42, a display indicating that the user wants to operate the effect button 125 at the timing of whether or not the reach state occurs is derived, and when the effect button 125 is operated. The pseudo-blade member 431 operates according to the content of the variable display (for example, when the state does not shift to the reach state, by operating the effect button 125, each time the pseudo-blade member 431 operates small, The pseudo blade member 431 is configured not to reach the functional position even when operated, and when shifting to the reach state, the pseudo blade member 431 is operated once or a plurality of predetermined times based on the operation of the effect button 125. The member 431 may be displaced to the functional position). However, the blade member 37 does not operate in accordance with the effect using the pseudo blade member 431, and is maintained in the closed position unless it is won by the ball-in support lottery.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration for operating the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 of the second starting winning device 33b is not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are operated by a motor, but may be operated by using another driving means such as a solenoid. Further, in the above embodiment, the motor is provided one-to-one with respect to the pair of blade members 37 and the pseudo blade members 431. For example, the pair of blade members 37 and the pseudo blade members 431 may be provided by one driving unit. May be configured to be able to operate. When the pseudo-side motor 432 is provided for the pseudo-blade member 431 in a one-to-one manner as in the above-described embodiment, only one of the pair of pseudo-blade members 431 is used for the effect using the pseudo-blade member 431. It is also possible to move or to perform separate operations on the left and right.

  Although the area of the front surface of the pseudo blade member 431 is larger than the area of the front surface of the blade member 37, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured so that the front of the blade member 37 can be almost covered. For example, they may be configured to have substantially the same area (the same shape when viewed from the front). When the upper side of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is above the upper surface of the blade member 37 in the open position (standby position side / closed position side) as in the above embodiment, the main Even if the blade member 37 controlled by the control device 261 starts to be displaced toward the closed position prior to the pseudo blade member 431, the blade member 37 is exposed to an area where the front is not covered by the pseudo blade member 431. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the starting winning unit 401 is in a state where the player's line of sight is generally higher than the position where the starting winning unit 401 is provided. In such a case, the blade member 37 can be hidden by the pseudo blade member 431 as much as possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, a predetermined panel may be interposed between the pseudo blade member 431 and the blade member 37, or the pseudo blade member 431 may be provided in front of the front decorative portion 403. In this case, the game ball collides with a step formed between the rear surface of the front decorative portion 403 and the pseudo blade member 431 set as the function position (the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member 431), and is hit off. Things can be avoided.

  (D; Material of Pseudo-Blade Member) In the above-described embodiment, the blade member 37 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The configuration of the front surface 431 may be the same as that of the front surface (corresponding to the above embodiment, a visual recognition mode imitating the forelimb of a whale). In this case, when the blade member 37 is set to the open position, even if the pseudo blade member 431 is not displaced to the functional position, the picture of the whale is completed, and the blade member 37 is in the open position. The mode of the start winning unit 401 when the 431 is in the standby position and the mode of the start winning unit 401 when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position may be substantially the same. it can.

  However, when such a configuration is adopted, the front and rear positions of the front surface of the blade member 37 and the front surface of the pseudo blade member 431 are shifted even if the front view shape is the same. Therefore, as in the above-described embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced to the functional position. However, the front view mode can be the same as the front side of the same pseudo blade member 431, and the pseudo blade opening mode can be more realistic. Note that, for example, by making the color of the blade member 37 the same as the color of the base plate 402, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the location of the blade member 37 as much as possible.

  (E; Shape of Pseudo-Blade Member, etc.) In the above-described embodiment, the distal end of the pseudo-blade member 431 in the functional position is configured to be located outside the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403. You may comprise so that it may fit in the inner peripheral side rather than a periphery. In particular, when the leading edge of the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced along the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403, the design can be improved. Note that, even when the distal end portion of the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to fit on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403, as in the above embodiment, the pseudo blade displaced to the functional position. The member 431 is configured to protrude to a position behind the general portion 442 having higher transparency than the character display portion 441 in the front decoration portion 403, so that, for example, the character display portion 441 or the like has relatively high transparency. The pseudo blade member 431 that has been displaced to the functional position can be more easily recognized as compared to a case where the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced only behind a low portion. In addition, the three-dimensional shape of the pseudo blade member 431 is not limited to a plate shape, and may be, for example, a substantially square frame shape that opens in the displacement direction of the pseudo blade member 431 and can accommodate the blade member 37 inside, The rectangular frame may be formed to have a substantially U-shaped cross section in which a part thereof is cut away.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48, a pressing recess 711 that opens forward and downward is provided at a lower portion on the front side of the blade member 37, and a pressing portion that can be inserted into the pressing recess 711 is provided on the rear surface side of the pseudo blade member 431. The projection 712 may be provided. In this case, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the blade member 37 is driven mainly (the blade-side motor 421 first, or only the blade-side motor 421), so that the (pseudo blade) Even if the operation of the member 431 is slightly delayed, the pseudo blade member 431 is pressed by the blade member 37 and is displaced from the standby position to the functional position.

  On the other hand, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is mainly driven (the pseudo motor 432 is driven first, or only the pseudo motor 432 is driven), so that the Even if the operation of 37 is slightly delayed, the blade member 37 is pressed by the pseudo blade member 431 and displaced from the open position to the closed position. As described above, by providing the pressing concave portion 711 and the pressing convex portion 712, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are prevented from operating independently, and the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are connected to each other. , And can be tuned and moved as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member 37 displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 displaced to the functional position are deviated, and whether the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position or only the pseudo blade member 431 is It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which it is easy to understand whether the object has just been displaced to the functional position.

  In addition, the pseudo blade member 431 of FIG. 48 arranges the pressing convex portion 712 as close to the axis of the pseudo blade member 431 as possible to play the game when the pseudo blade member 431 is independently displaced to the functional position. Due to the ball colliding with the pressing convex portion 712, the game ball is prevented from being irregularly flipped and the pressing convex portion 712 from being damaged. However, the position at which the pressing convex portion 712 is formed is not particularly limited. For example, a configuration in which the pseudo blade member 431 at the functional position is driven to push the blade member 37 at the open position to be displaced to the closed position. In the above, by disposing the pressing convex portion 712 as far away from the axis of the pseudo blade member 431 as possible, it is possible to minimize the force required to push the blade member 37 at the open position to displace the blade member 37 to the closed position. it can.

  Even when the pressing concave portion 711 and the pressing convex portion 712 are provided, from the state where the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, only the pseudo blade member 431 is moved to the functional position side while the blade member 37 is kept in the closed position. It is possible to displace. In addition, by providing the pressing convex portion 712 on the rotating shaft side of the pseudo-blade member 431 as much as possible, it is possible to minimize a decrease in visibility of a game ball moving behind the semi-transparent pseudo-blade member 431. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper surface of the pressing concave portion 711 forms a blade-side pressing portion, and the pressing convex portion 712 forms a pseudo-side pressing portion.

  In the above-described embodiment, the blade member 37 is configured to fit on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403. However, at least the distal end of the blade member 37 at the open position is the front decorative portion. 403 may be configured to be located outside the outer peripheral edge. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to cover the entire front of the blade member 37. For example, the front end of the blade member 37 is located ahead of the front end of the pseudo blade member 431. A configuration that cannot be partially covered, such as protruding in the (centrifugal direction of the rotating shaft), may be adopted. That is, for example, a configuration is such that the distal end portion of the blade member 37 at the open position protrudes to the outer peripheral side from the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403 and protrudes from the distal end portion of the pseudo blade member 431 at the functional position. When employed, the tip of the blade member 37 is exposed forward, making it easier to confirm that the blade member 37 is in the open position.

  (F: Configuration in which the pseudo blade member is omitted) In the above embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 capable of covering the front of the blade member 37 is provided, but the pseudo blade member 431 may be omitted. In addition, when the pseudo blade member 431 is omitted, in order to make it difficult to recognize whether the blade member 37 is in the open position or in the closed position, the front decorative portion 403 is located in front of the blade member 37 in the open position. In correspondence with the position, the character display unit 441 is configured to draw the forelimb of the whale, and the display of the forelimb of the whale (translucent) covers the front of the wing member 37 in the open position. You may comprise.

  The blade member 37 in the closed position may be configured to be covered with the body of the whale or the like, similarly to the above-described embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the forelimb of the whale constitutes the covering means at the time of opening (the covering part at the time of opening), and the display of the body of the whale constitutes the covering means at the time of closing (the covering part at the time of closing). Incidentally, in the above embodiment, the pseudo-blade member 431 in the functional position constitutes the open-time covering means, and the display of the body of the whale (and the pseudo-blade member 431 in the standby position) constitutes the closed-time covering means.

  (G: Modified example of pseudo blade opening mode) Further, instead of or in addition to the pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member 37 by the pseudo blade member 431 is in the open position, another pseudo blade opening mode is provided. Another pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving the mode may be provided.

  (G-1; light guide plate) For example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the front decoration section 403, by irradiating light from the side, an aspect imitating the forelimb of a whale emerges at a portion where light is incident. It may be configured as follows. More specifically, light enters the front decorative portion 403 from the side into a range (hereinafter, referred to as a “light emitting portion 721”) surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light is reflected so that the reflection angle of the light is different from that of the other parts (a light guide plate that is not totally reflected in the front decoration part 403 and is irradiated forward). In this example, the light-emitting unit 721 forms a pseudo open object.

  Light is incident on the light emitting unit 721 from a portion corresponding to the base of the front leg of the whale. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, a cylindrical shaft support portion 724 protruding from the front surface of the blade member 722 is provided in front of a portion of the blade member 722 connected to the blade shaft 723. The shaft support portion 724 is inserted into a bearing portion 438 (see FIG. 45 (b)) formed in a circular concave shape at a position corresponding to the base of the front leg of the whale on the rear side of the front decoration portion 403, and is supported by the shaft. .

  The blade shaft 723 has a cylindrical shape, and a core rod 726 having a simulation light source 725 is inserted through a part of the outer peripheral surface at the front (front) end of the blade shaft 723. The core rod 726 also has a cylindrical shape, and the wiring for the simulation light source 725 is inserted inside the core rod 726. In the present embodiment, the front end of the core rod 726 projects forward from the blade shaft 723 and is housed inside the shaft support 724 of the blade member 722. That is, the simulation light source 725 is located on the inner peripheral side of the bearing portion 438 of the front decoration portion 403.

  The core rod 726 is also provided with a gear 727 that is connected to a motor (not shown), and is configured to be rotatable. In the present embodiment, the core rod 726 is located at the position where the light source 725 for simulation is opposed to the light emitting unit 721 (see FIG. 50B) provided at the same position as the blade member 722 at the open position in front view. In the front view, the position of the dummy light source 725 is opposite to the position of the light emitting unit 721 (see FIG. 50 (c)) provided at the same position as the blade member 722 at the intermediate position between the open position and the closed position. It is configured to be displaceable between them. In the state shown in FIG. 50A, the light source for simulation 725 is turned off.

  Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the same condition as the condition for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 alone to the functional position in the above embodiment is satisfied), the blade member 722 that opens and closes is copied. As shown in FIG. 50C, the light emitting unit 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the middle of opening is made to emit light, and then the light emitting unit 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the open position as shown in FIG. 50B. After a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the light emitting unit 721 imitating the blade member 722 being closed is caused to emit light, and then the simulation light source 725 is turned off.

  Even in the case of employing the above configuration, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade opening mode. In addition, since the pseudo-blade opening mode can be derived in the front decorative portion 403, for example, the pseudo-blade opening mode is compared with a case where the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived at a position behind the blade member 722. Easiness can be improved.

  When the blade member 722 operates, the light emitting section 721 may be configured to synchronize as much as possible to emit light. In this case, the mode in which the blade member 722 is displaced to the open position and the mode in which the pseudo blade is opened can be made as close as possible. Further, instead of rotating the simulation light source 725, a plurality of simulation light sources that can emit light from the respective light emitting units 721 may be provided.

  (G-2: Transmission hole) Further, for example, in the base plate 402 for attaching the starting winning unit 401 to the game board 30, light is incident from the rear, so that the blade member 37 is modeled in a portion where the light is incident. It may be configured such that the above-mentioned aspect emerges. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (c), the main body of the blade member 731 is made of an opaque resin, and a rectangular opening is formed on the front side. The prism plate 732 is fitted there. Further, a light source is built in the blade member 731.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a portion of the base plate 734 where the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 is in the open position in the front view, and an intermediate position between the open position and the closed position. A transmission hole having the same shape as the prism plate 732 is formed corresponding to the portion of the blade member 731 in which the prism plate 732 is located, and the dummy prism plate 735 is fitted therein. Further, behind the simulating prism plates 735, simulating light sources for causing the simulating prism plates 735 to emit light are provided. In the present embodiment, the prism plate 732 capable of emitting light constitutes a light emitting means, and the pseudo prism plate 735 constitutes a pseudo open object.

  In this embodiment, when the blade member 731 is located at a position other than the closed position, the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 emits light. When the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the same condition as the condition for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 alone to the functional position in the above embodiment is satisfied), the blade member 731 that opens and closes is copied. After the pseudo prism plate 735 imitating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the middle of being opened is made to emit light, the pseudo prism plate 735 imitating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the open position is made to emit light, and the light is emitted for a predetermined time. Thereafter, the pseudo prism plate 735 simulating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the middle of closing is caused to emit light, and then the pseudo light source is turned off.

  Even in the case of employing the above configuration, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade opening mode. In addition, behind the blade member 731 (the base plate 734), a pseudo blade opening mode can be derived with a relatively simple configuration. Further, in the present embodiment, a prism plate 732 capable of deriving a mode in which light is emitted from the blade member 731 is provided, and the pseudo blade opening mode imitates the light emitting mode of the prism plate 732. In this way, by setting the blade member 731 to a visual recognition mode in which the blade member 731 itself emits light, the mode in which the blade member 731 is in the open position and the mode in which the pseudo blade is opened using the pseudo prism plate 735 can be used. You can connect more strongly (it can be confused by intuitive judgment at a glance). In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration (shape) for deriving the pseudo blade opening mode (a pseudo mode is achieved by merely imitating the prism plate 732 instead of the entire blade member 731).

  Note that the timing of deriving the pseudo blade opening mode is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be periodically (for example, almost always) derived. In addition, for example, as an opening pattern of the second start winning device 33b, a short open time in which the open state is short and a long open time in which the open state is long are set. The operation of the blade member 37 is relatively difficult to understand by deriving the blade opening mode, and in the case of the long opening, the derivation of the pseudo blade opening mode is prohibited, and the operation of the blade member 37 is relatively easy to understand. You may comprise. However, in a configuration in which the operation of the blade member 37 is easier to understand when the pseudo blade member 431 is operated together with the blade member 37 as in the above-described embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 is It is operated together with the blade member 37. In some cases, the long opening may be made difficult to understand.

  (H; Movable Covering Means) In the above embodiment, a movable covering member (movable covering means) having a see-through property such as the pseudo blade member 431 is provided so as to cover the front of the blade member 37. However, the movable covering member is used to guide the game ball to a predetermined portion of the winning device, particularly around the winning opening (a game ball moving around), or to a predetermined winning device (the slider of the above embodiment). 411, a game nail, etc. The blade member 37 of the above-described embodiment is configured so as to cover the front of a peripheral portion (a game ball moving therethrough) of the guide member. Is also good. Then, the movable covering member may be configured to be displaceable between a functional position for covering the front of the covering target and a standby position for exposing the covering target forward.

  In this case, when the movable covering role is in the functional position, even though the movable covering means has transparency, how the game ball is applied to the covering target covered with the movable covering role. Whether they are involved, that is, if the starting winning devices 33a and 33b are covered, whether or not the game ball has entered, or if the guide means is covered, the game ball is guided by the guide means. The visibility is relatively low as to whether or not guidance has been given. In particular, when the movable covering role is in operation or immediately after the movement, the player's line of sight is hung on the movable covering role, and this tendency is further increased. Therefore, a situation occurs in which the player loses an eye for a moment even if the player follows the game ball, or the player tries to grasp the trend of the game ball by another method (for example, display of the hold icon 461 on the decorative symbol display device 42). It is conceivable that a new effect (such as the pseudo-hold icon 466) is added thereto. As a result, a more dramatic development and effect can be generated with respect to the entry of the game ball into the start winning device 33a, 33b (start winning), and the interest can be improved.

  When such a configuration is employed, as in the above-described embodiment, a game in which the game area such as the guide nail 448 is moved to a position immediately below the movable covering member (pseudo blade member 431) at the functional position. It is desirable to provide a course changing means for changing the traveling direction of the ball.

  In the case of adopting such a configuration, a game ball that has entered a region (specific covering region) covered by the movable covering member (pseudo blade member 431) at the functional position and the outside of the specific covering region are easily visible. It may be difficult to understand the relationship between the game ball and the game ball that has jumped to the place, and the game ball may have entered the start winning device (the second start winning device 33b) or be guided by the guide means (the blade member 37). It can create more situations that may or may not be. Thereby, in the case of performing an effect that teaches and suggests what has happened to the game ball that has entered the specific covered area, such an effect can be made more effective.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), in a region (specific covering region) covered with the movable covering accessory in the functional position, the guide nail 448 is moved by increasing the amount of driving into the game board 30. You may comprise so that it may arrange | position. In addition, a game ball guided by the guide means (for example, a game ball moving on the upper surface of the blade member 37 in the open position as in the above embodiment) or a game after being guided by the guide means The front of at least a part of the ball (for example, a game ball that has bounced off by hitting the upper side of the guide nail 448) is configured to be covered with the movable covering member in the functional position. Is desirable.

  Further, when the object to be covered with the movable covering material in the functional position is the guide means, the front of the peripheral portion of the starting winning device (the second starting winning device 33b) to which the game ball is guided by the guiding device. It is desirable to provide a front decoration part 403 (a general part of the pre-covering means) that covers the front. Further, it is desirable that the front decoration portion 403 and the movable covering member (pseudo-blade member 431) at the functional position are arranged so that a part thereof is continuous or close to each other in a front view. Further, a game ball guided by guide means whose front is covered by a movable covering agent, or a game ball whose course is changed by a course changing unit, is moved forward by a movable covering agent in a functional position. It is configured to be able to move to a region (general covering region) whose front is covered by the front decorative portion 403 without (almost) being exposed to an uncovered region (exposure time during movement is as short as possible). Is desirable.

  In addition, by providing a course changing means (for example, a guide stand 446) also in an area (general covering area) covered in front by the front decoration part 403, the behavior of the game ball in the general covering area and the specific covering area can be grasped more. This makes it difficult to understand the correspondence between the game balls entering the covered area and the game balls discharged from the covered area. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which the game ball that has entered the covered area may have entered the start winning device (the second start winning device 33b) or may not have entered the ball. Further, by providing the pseudo prize detection switch 445 in a region (general covering region) whose front is covered by the front decoration portion 403, it is possible to improve the game performance and the performance.

(I: Aspect of pseudo hold icon)
(I-1) In the above embodiment, the mode of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 or the second starting winning switch 224b, the floating ring type pseudo holding icon 466 or the temporary holding icon 464 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device. At 42, a display that appears at a position to the right of the hold display area 462 and moves (rolls) toward the hold display area 462 on the left side is started. If the second start winning switch 224b is detected, the temporary holding icon 464 reaches the specified position of the holding display area 462 and stops, and the display mode is switched to the final holding icon 463, and the pseudo winning detection is performed. In the case of the detection of the switch 445, a display is made such that the pseudo hold icon 466 does not stop even when it reaches the specified position of the hold display area 462 and disappears outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 as it is. It may be configured as follows.

  It should be noted that the hold icon 463 may be configured to have a predetermined movement. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the character constituting the main holding icon 463 performs an operation such as waving a hand or changing a facial expression to such an extent that the character does not fall out of the holding display area 462. In addition, when the pseudo hold icon 466 itself is operating, the temporary hold icon 464 is switched to the permanent hold icon 463 by displaying the permanent hold icon 463 so that the movement is connected. This makes it easier for the player to recognize. However, when differentiating the temporary hold icon 464 and the pseudo hold icon 466 from the main hold icon 463 only by the size of the operation, there is a concern that the difference may be difficult to understand depending on the degree. , Shape, pattern, hue, and the like are changed to achieve differentiation.

  In addition, from the viewpoint of enjoying the effect of whether or not the start winning has been performed using the pseudo winning detection switch 445, at least one start winning device (second The start prize device 33b) and the pseudo prize detection switch 445 only need to be present, and other configurations disposed in such an area, a configuration in which the start prize device (the second start prize device 33b) is opened and closed, and the like. Can be omitted.

  (I-2) For example, as shown in FIG. 54, a snowman 751 is employed as a holding icon, and based on the detection of the false winning detection switch 445 or the second start winning switch 224b, the holding display area 462 is displayed. A display in which snow or the like falls from above is started, and a pseudo-hold icon or a snowman 752 being created as a temporary hold icon is displayed at a predetermined position in the hold display area 462, and gradually rises. It may be configured.

  Further, for example, the motif of the hold icon 461 set for each model as an additional display displayed in front of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 together with the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 Can be changed as needed. For example, an additional display such as a stage curtain, or an additional display during work (for example, a work scaffold is installed around the pseudo hold icon 466 and a worker is working) is performed. It may be good. Note that the additional display such as the bubble display 467 can be omitted.

  By employing these configurations, the impression that the pseudo-hold icon 466 and the temporary-hold icon 464 have not been determined, and that the pseudo-hold icon 466 and the temporary-hold icon 464 may be further changed, is strongly impressed. Can be given. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles caused by misunderstanding the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 as the real hold icon 463 (variable display is not started even if there is a hold, or the hold has disappeared, etc.). can do.

  (J: prize history) Also, for example, the detection history of the first start prize switch 224a (time of each detection), the detection history of the second start prize detection switch (time of each detection), and the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch A detection history storage unit capable of storing histories (time of each detection) may be provided, and information stored in the detection history storage unit may be output. For example, the detection history storage unit is provided in the sub-control device 262 or a control device electrically connected to the sub-control device 262. May read out the storage information of the detection history storage means and display it on the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, the same information as the information stored in the detection history storage means may be output to the hall computer of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

  In this case, for example, if a trouble occurs due to the player misunderstanding the pseudo hold icon 466 as the real hold icon 463, data for explaining the circumstances and the like can be reliably obtained, and the trouble is broken. Can be avoided.

  (K: Erasing Pseudo Hold Icon) The conditions for deleting the pseudo hold icon 466 in the above embodiment are not particularly limited. For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is detected in a state where the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed, a temporary hold icon 466 is used instead of the pseudo hold icon 466. Although the hold icon 464 or the final hold icon 463 is configured to be displayed, even if the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is detected (the number of the pseudo hold icons 466 is taken into account). However, the pseudo hold icon 466 may be continuously displayed (when the hold upper limit is not reached).

  Further, the pseudo-hold icon 466 is configured to be displayed even when no change display is held, or the pseudo-hold icon 466 is not erased by performing only one shift processing of the hold. Or you may. In this case, there is a possibility that a situation where only the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed in the hold display area 462 may occur. It is configured so that it may be reached. Furthermore, an effect when the timing of the start of the variable display is reached with the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 (for example, when the bubble display 467 becomes large and then disappears, whether the hold icon 461 remains ( It is desirable to perform an effect) such as whether or not the main suspension icon 463 is displayed.

  Further, the number of the holding icons 461 (the main holding icon 463 and the temporary holding icon 464) displayed at a time in the holding display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the pseudo holding icon 466 is the holding upper limit of the variable display. The number may exceed (8 in the above embodiment). In addition, based on a predetermined operation of the player, the pseudo hold icon 466 is deleted, the temporary hold icon 464 is changed to the permanent hold icon 463, such a change is prompted, or an effect accompanied by such change is derived. Or may be configured to perform

  (L; Hold Icon) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b the variable display is based on the ball entry. However, for example, there may be a mode in which information indicating whether the hold icon 461 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, or such a mode (predetermined mode) When a predetermined condition such as winning in the lottery is satisfied, or when a predetermined input operation is performed by the player, or when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a state in which the input operation is performed, the mode is derived. ).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to display a maximum of eight hold icons 461. For example, five or more variable displays of the special display devices 43L and 43R are held in total. Even if it is performed, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to display only up to four hold icons 461 at the maximum. In addition, for example, when the number of the hold icons 461 can be displayed by the same number as the upper limit of the number of hold of the variable display (eight in the above example), or when the pseudo hold icon 466 is included, a larger number can be displayed. In this case, in order to reduce the display space (holding display area 462) of the hold icon 461, for example, four hold icons 461 that are consumed first are displayed larger than the hold icons 461 that are consumed later. May be configured. In addition, the mode of the hold icon 461 to be exhausted later may be configured to be a simplified state in which the number of holds can be grasped.

  (M: Pseudo Winning Detection Switch) In the above embodiment, the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is provided downstream of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. It may be provided upstream of the second start winning device 33b, or may be provided downstream of one of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b and the other upstream. When the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is located upstream of the first start prize device 33a or the second start prize device 33b, the game ball detected by the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is not the first start prize device 33a or the second start prize device 33a. The two-start winning device 33b may be configured to be able to enter the ball, or may not be allowed to enter the ball (for example, a game ball that has passed through the pseudo-winning detection switch 445 may enter the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b). A game ball that is guided to a place where no ball is entered, or a pseudo winning detection switch 445 is installed in a winning opening or an out opening provided in the covered area, or a game ball that enters the winning opening or the out opening. Or may be configured to also serve as a detection switch for detection). In particular, when adopting a configuration in which the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is provided in the winning opening provided in the covering area, or in the out opening, the game ball that has entered the starting winning unit 401 has won the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. It becomes more difficult to understand whether or not.

  (N: Movable Front Decoration Part) In the above embodiment, the front decoration part 403 is provided so as not to be relatively displaceable with respect to the game board 30. However, the front decoration part 403 may be provided so as to be relatively displaceable. For example, as shown in FIG. 52, a rotation shaft 762 may be attached to the rear surface side of the front decoration portion 761, and the rotation shaft 762 may be configured to be rotatable by a motor 763 as decoration driving means. Further, the motor 763 may be configured to be driven based on detection of the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b.

  In this case, the operation of the front decoration unit 761 can detect the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, and therefore, the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning. The game can be advanced with a relatively sense of security without confirming that the game ball enters the device 33b directly. As a result, attention can be paid to an effect or the like that teaches the result of the success / failure lottery.

  Also, for example, the detection of either the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b may make the front decoration 761 displaceable in a similar manner. Further, the configuration may be such that the motor 763 can be driven even when the false winning detection switch 445 is detected and the false hold icon 466 is displayed. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo holding icon 466 is immediately recognized as not being the temporary holding icon 464 (the main holding icon 463) by the operation mode of the front decoration section 761.

  In addition, the rotating shaft 762 of FIG. 52 has a portion attached to the front decoration portion 761 and a portion attached with the gear 766 meshed with the pinion 765 attached to the drive shaft 764 of the motor 763 as elastic means. They are connected by a coil spring 767. For this reason, even if the motor 763 is not driven, the front decoration portion 761 is configured to be displaceable based on the contact of the game ball with the front decoration portion 761.

  For this reason, it is possible to add interest to the operation of the front decorative portion 761. Further, since the front decoration portion 761 is displaced only by the collision of the game ball with the front decoration portion 761, for the beginner player, the game ball almost always enters the start winning device 33a, 33b. You can have a sense of expectation.

  The configuration in which the front decoration portion 761 is configured to be displaceable by the motor 763 and is capable of being displaced by the collision of the game ball without driving the motor 763 is not particularly limited. For example, when the motor 763 is not driven, the link mechanism (the pinion 765 and the gear 766) that links the motor 763 and the front decoration portion 761 is not engaged, and when the motor 763 is not driven, the front decoration is not driven. The portion 761 may be configured to be supported by an elastic body. In order to reduce the load on the coil spring 767, for example, it is desirable to provide a portion of the rotating shaft 762 that is attached to the front decoration portion 761 or a bearing portion that supports the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 761.

  Further, for example, a panel is installed so as to abut or approach the rear surface of the front decoration portion 761 so that the operation of the front decoration portion 761 does not affect other configurations (the bearing portion 438 is attached to the panel). And the like). Further, a plurality of front decoration portions are provided so as to be overlapped with each other so that different operations can be performed (for example, a different picture is drawn for each front decoration portion and the relative position is changed, so that the front decoration portion is changed from the front). (The visible pattern also changes). For example, if there is a constantly operating front decoration, the behavior of a game ball moving behind it becomes more difficult to visually recognize. Further, for example, it is also possible to configure so as to suggest and teach predetermined information by a combination of the positions of a plurality of front decorative portions.

  (O: Winning Effect Sound) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, for example, a first winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the first start winning switch 224a and a second winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the second start winning switch 224b. The second winning effect sound, the first winning effect sound, and the mixed winning effect sound close to the second winning effect sound can be generated, and the second starting effect sound or the second winning effect sound is detected based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b. The configuration may be such that the confusion winning effect sound is generated and the confusion winning effect sound is generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 (when the pseudo holding icon 466 is displayed). The functions of the sub-control device 262 and the like for generating these sound effects constitute sound effect generating means.

  In this case, even if the player does not directly look at the start winning devices 33a and 33b, it is possible to confirm the entry of game balls into the start winning devices 33a and 33b by sound effects, thereby allowing the game to proceed more smoothly. Can be. In addition, by configuring such that a mixed winning effect sound can be generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, even if the pseudo holding icon 466 is displayed without the sound effect, the temporary holding icon 464 (final holding icon) is displayed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is immediately determined that the icon is not the icon 463).

  Further, the confusion winning effect sound may be derived even when the second start winning switch 224b is detected. Therefore, even if the pseudo-hold icon 466 is displayed due to the difference in sound effects, no sound effect is accompanied, so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is immediately determined that the temporary hold icon 464 is not the main hold icon 463. be able to. As a result, the effect that a game ball may have entered the second starting winning device 33b can be made more realistic.

  The confusion winning effect sound may be created separately from the first winning effect sound and the second winning effect sound, or may be configured by outputting the first winning effect sound and the second winning effect sound simultaneously. Good. Further, the first winning effect sound or the confusion winning effect sound may be generated based on the detection of the first start winning switch 224a. In addition, the confusion winning sound effect derived based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 forms a pseudo winning mode.

  Further, for example, a sub-control is provided with a first start ball counting counter that counts the number of times the first start winning switch 224a is detected, and a second start ball counter that counts the number of times the second start switch 224b is detected. The device 262 compares the number of detections of the first start winning switch 224a per predetermined period with the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b, and compares the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b with the number of first start winning switches 224a. When the ratio of the number of times of detection is less than or equal to a specified value, the confusion winning effect sound may be generated based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b.

  In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given an impression that the game balls have not entered the first start winning device 33a very much. The function of comparing the number of detections of the first start winning switch 224a and the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b per predetermined period of the sub-control device 262 constitutes a ball entry ratio determining means.

  In addition, for example, a sound effect is also given when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position (except during the jackpot state or during the reach effect on the decorative symbol display device 42, or the volume may be lowered). May be configured. As an aspect example, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, one of the first blade open sound effect and the second blade open sound effect is derived, and the blade member 37 is moved to the closed position. In the case where only the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position alone in the maintained state, the second blade opening sound effect may be derived. Note that the sound effect accompanying the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 in the pseudo blade effect is set separately.

  (P) In the above embodiment, based on the detection of the first start winning switch 224a, the detection of the second start winning switch 224b, or the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, the game ball is sent to the start winning device 33a or 33b. The suggestion display suggesting a ball entry may be performed in a place other than the start winning unit 401 and the ordinary symbol display device 41. For example, predetermined light-emitting means (light-emitting means incorporated in the center frame 47 or the annular illumination part 102 of the front frame set 14) emit light, or the reserved icon 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42 appears more flashy. In the decorative design display device 42, a configuration may be adopted in which a smaller character appears or an aspect (display, sound effect, etc.) originally scheduled to be derived is derived at that timing. In this case, there is an opportunity that the player does not see the game balls entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b based on the display, or does not want to see the start winning unit 401 because he wants to view the display. Can be increased. Therefore, the operation and effect of having the game proceed without worrying about how the game balls enter the start winning devices 33a and 33b can be further achieved.

  (Q: Proximity detection sensor) In the above embodiment, proximity detection means capable of detecting proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the decorative symbol display device 42 and connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 (For example, a proximity detection sensor or a touch panel having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit) may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the proximity is determined based on the detection of the finger or the like. If the target for which is detected is the pseudo-hold icon 466, the pseudo-hold icon 466 may be deleted, and if the target for which proximity has been detected is the temporary hold icon 464, the display may be switched to the permanent hold icon 463. In this case, it is possible to improve the interest in the holding icon 461, and to further enhance the feeling of closeness to an effect (pseudo holding or the like) in which a game ball may have entered the start winning devices 33a and 33b.

  (R) In the above embodiment, data exchange (so-called mobile-linked game) between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine maker or the like is performed via a communication portable terminal or the like owned by the player. You may comprise so that it can perform. Further, when ending the mobile-linked game, the two-dimensional code including the current game information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the mobile communication terminal, and uses the mobile communication terminal to read the two-dimensional code. In the configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first ball entry counter that counts the number of balls entered into the first startup prize device 33a, and a second startup prize device. A second ball entry counter that counts the number of balls entered into the ball 33b and a pseudo ball counter that counts the number of times the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is detected are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile-linked game. The two-dimensional code is configured to include information indicating the value of the first ball entry counter, the value of the second ball entry counter, and the value of the pseudo ball entry counter. It may be that you are. Further, information on the total number of shot game balls may be included in the two-dimensional code. In this case, the gaming machine maker can grasp the degree of the ball entering each of the start winning devices 33a and 33b.

  The value of the first ball entry counter, the value of the second ball entry counter, and the value of the pseudo ball entry counter are erased by being two-dimensionally encoded, and otherwise (even if the power is turned off). ) May be stored. Further, the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo wing member 431 may be configured so that the player can select from several types (with respect to the player playing the mobile-linked game).

  (S) In the above embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is arranged below the first start winning device 33a. However, for example, the second start winning device 33b may be arranged side by side. . In the above-described embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 not only covers the front of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, but also another winning device (for example, the variable winning device 32 or the through gate 34). May be configured so as to cover. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the numbers of the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the variable winning devices 32, the through gates 34, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be set for each model. For example, two variable winning devices 32 may be provided, or three or more starting winning devices 33a, 33b and through gates 34 may be provided.

  Furthermore, the second starting winning device 33b of the above-described embodiment includes a pair of left and right blade members 37 whose central axis extends in the front-rear direction. For example, the central axis extends in the left-right direction like the variable winning device 32. The second starting winning device 33b may be changed between an open state and a closed state by rotating and displacing the shutter. When this configuration is adopted, for example, the shutter may have a two-layer structure of a pseudo shutter on the front side (for example, decoration on the front side) and a main shutter on the rear side (for example, a transparent plate shape). Further, in the case of adopting such a configuration, the folded portion projecting rearward from the upper side mold of the pseudo blade shutter and covering the front edge of the blade member 37 in the open position from the front when the pseudo blade member is set to the functional position. You may comprise so that it may be provided. It should be noted that the second start winning device 33b can always allow a game ball to enter or the blade member 37 can be omitted, as in the first start winning device 33a.

  In the above embodiment, the number of game balls (prize balls) paid out when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and the number of game balls paid out when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b. Although the number of game balls to be played is set to be the same, it may be set to be different. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, in a configuration in which game balls easily enter the second starting winning device 33b, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first starting winning device 33a may be increased. Good.

  (T) In the above embodiment, the timing at which game balls are paid out from the payout device 358 (see FIG. 5) to the ball tray such as the upper plate 19 via the payout passage 68 (see FIG. 3) may be changed. A paying-out time adjusting means that can be provided may be provided. In this case, even if the pseudo-blade member 431, the pseudo-hold icon 466, and the like are provided, the starting winning unit depends on whether or not the game balls are paid out (prize balls) based on the game balls entering the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. It is instructed whether or not the game ball that has entered 401 (the covered area on the back side of the front decoration unit 403) has entered the start winning devices 33a and 33b (either the pseudo-hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464). It is possible to suppress the situation that the user is grasped before.

  As an example of the mode, as shown in FIG. 55, the dispensing time adjusting means 791 constituting a part of the dispensing passage 68 for communicating between the dispensing device 358 and the upper plate 19 is provided in the left-right direction (the front-rear direction is also possible). A main passage 792 serving as a first passage extending in a meandering manner, and a predetermined position (first position) of the main passage 792 and a position downstream of the main passage 792 (second position) are connected at a relatively short distance. The bypass passage 793 serving as the second passage provided as described above, and a connection state (an entrance of the bypass passage 793) between the main passage 792 and the bypass passage 793, and a closed state (the second passage) for guiding game balls to the main passage 792. (A first guide state) and a state in which the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 793, and a second guide state. Further, the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 pass through the main passage 792 (without passing through the bypass passage 793) to the upper plate 19 (the lower plate 15 when the upper plate 19 is full of game balls). The second time required when the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 are paid out to the upper plate 19 via the bypass passage 793 is shorter than the first time required for paying out.

  Then, for example, the shutter 794 is opened in the jackpot state where the game balls are dispensed relatively frequently or in the probable change mode. Instead of continuing to close). In this case, it becomes difficult to determine when and to which prize device the game ball paid out to the upper plate 19 or the like corresponds to the ball entry into the prize device. Can be suppressed.

  Also, various effects can be performed using the payout time adjusting means 791. Further, when such a configuration is adopted, the shutter 794 may be opened based on the operation of the effect button 125 or the like. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot types with different numbers of rounds, the shutter 794 is basically closed, and the game balls paid out in response to the winning in the variable winning device 32 in the previous round are the meandering main ball. When the round continues along the passage 792, the shutter 794 is opened based on the operation of the effect button 125 by the player (and the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 at once). You may comprise. In this case, a refreshing feeling that the game ball is paid out by the player's own operation can be given, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

  In addition, the shutter 794 may be configured to be maintained in the closed state in a state where the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is not stored. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player stops the game and leaves the seat before the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 19.

  The configuration of the dispensing time adjusting means 791 is not particularly limited. For example, a first passage extending in a meandering manner, a second passage provided in parallel with the first passage and extending in a substantially straight line, and a dispensing device 358 are provided. A switching valve capable of switching between a first guiding state for guiding game balls paid out from the first path to the first passage and a second guiding state for guiding game balls paid out from the payout device 358 to the second path. You may comprise so that it may be equipped. In addition, the time required for the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 to be paid out to the upper plate 19 via the payout path varies depending not only on the distance of the payout path but also on the angle, shape (course) and the like. .

  (U) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 of each jackpot type, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the variable prize device 32 may perform the same operation as the big hit state of “2RS”, and may set a big hit to which the “normal mode” is given after the big hit state ends. In the above-described embodiment, the “probable change mode” is given after the big hit state of “2RS” ends. However, instead, the low ball entry state and the high probability state are provided. May be configured to provide a “latent mode” in which no one of the high-probability state and the low-probability state is taught.

  It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured so that the teaching of winning the certainty variable jackpot (15RS) with a payout is always performed at the latest at the end of the corresponding jackpot state. This is not performed even if the corresponding jackpot state ends (even in the case of the internally variable probability mode, the decorative symbol display device 42 shifts to the same retraction stage as the time reduction mode, and the special display device 43L in the time reduction mode). , 43R may exceed the upper limit number of times (100 times) in the time reduction mode, and may shift to the certainty change stage.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / rejecting lottery is changed. However, the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high ball entry state given after the end of the jackpot state ( The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns (variations) are prepared. Further, in the winning / winning lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a (and the second start winning device 33b), the variable winning device 32 performs the same operation as the big hit state of “2RS”, while the game mode is You may be comprised so that there may be a case where the "small hit" which does not change is won.

  Further, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second start winning device 33b when winning, and the like can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the winning upper limit of the game ball in one opening to the second start winning device 33b may be set. More specifically, when a start winning upper limit counter that counts the number of game balls entering the second starting winning device 33b to reach the winning upper limit is provided, and when the second start winning switch 224b is detected. (For example, after step S503 of the start winning prize processing), the processing of subtracting 1 from the value of the start winning prize upper limit counter is performed, and when the second start prize winning device 33b is opened (for example, the step of the ordinary figure discriminating information setting processing). After S2405 and step S2407, a value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set in the starting winning upper limit counter (for example, 1 is set if the winning upper limit is one), and the open state of the second starting winning device 33b is set. If the timing for closing the vehicle has not yet arrived (for example, if a negative determination is made in step S2204 of the start prize device control process), the start prize may be increased. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter has become “0”. If a negative determination is made, the start winning device control processing is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made, the second startup winning device is immediately started. The process shifts to a process of closing the switch 33b (step S2205), and also to a process (for example, after the step S2218) performed when the right to open the second start winning device 33b is obtained a plurality of times. A value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set in the start winning upper limit counter (for example, 1 is set if the winning upper limit is one).

  (V) In the above-described embodiment, the first variable display based on the entering of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a and the second variable display based on the entering of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b are performed. Regardless of which one, the corresponding variable display is suspended in the order in which game balls enter the first starting prize device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b, and the variable display that has been previously retained is consumed in order. Although it is configured as described above, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the second variable display suspended after the first variable display already suspended is consumed before the first variable display. The second variable display may be configured to be digested with higher priority than the first variable display.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the winning is determined based on the winning / winning lottery performed based on the ball entering the first starting prize device 33a, and the winning is determined based on the ball entering the second starting prize device 33b. It is configured so that the distribution rate of the jackpot type that can be given is the same as when the jackpot is won by the lottery, but the decision is made when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. Separate jackpot type tables may be referred to in the lottery and the winning / non-winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, and the jackpot type may be assigned differently. For example, when a jackpot is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the prize in the second start winning prize device 33b, the payout is larger than in the case where the jackpot is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the prize in the first starting prize apparatus 33a. It is configured so that the ratio of the jackpot with balls increases or the ratio of the jackpot to which the probability change mode (not the latent mode) is increased (the ratio of the high probability state is the same). Alternatively, if a jackpot is won in a winning / winning lottery based on a prize in the second starting prize device 33b, a winning may be selected in a winning / winning lottery based on a prize in the first starting prize device 33a. It may be configured such that a jackpot of no type can be given.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the prize ball given to the player is determined depending on whether the ball has entered the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. Although the numbers are configured differently, they may be configured to be the same.

  (W) In the above embodiment, the main controller 261 performs the main processing (see FIG. 9), and then performs the normal processing (see FIG. 10). However, the present invention is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main processing, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal processing in the above embodiment is performed. For example, in the timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec, The process performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the processing in step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, A configuration that turns on a flag indicating the occurrence of the error. Further, the process of step S401 may be separately performed as an NMI interrupt process, as in the above embodiment.

  (X) In the above-described embodiment, the information as to whether or not the big hit state occurs is overwritten in the hit random number storage area for storing the value of the hit random number counter C1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the winning random number storage area for the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a jackpot occurs may be provided. In addition to the area, an execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and a storage area individually corresponding to each holding area may be provided, and information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition, a storage area for storing a jackpot type may be provided separately from the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the special symbol change display, it is checked again whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning, and the result of the confirmation processing (the state of the success / failure flag etc.) ) May be configured to determine the pattern of the variable display or the like.

  (Y) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, a movable area that can be changed to a specific area where a game ball moving in the game area can enter the ball, an open state allowing ball entry into the specific area, and a closed state prohibiting ball entry into the specific area ( Wing member), a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and a game ball entering a specific ball entry means is detected. Specific ball detecting means (condition satisfaction detecting means), special starting means provided outside the specific area and allowing game balls moving in the game area to enter the ball, and detecting a game ball entering the special starting means A special start detecting means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and a main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means. No matter which ball you enter, a given number of game values (game balls) are given to the player The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, a small hitting state in which the variable ball entry means is opened once or a plurality of times only for a first time, or The second time is longer than the second time, or whether a large hit state in which the predetermined number of game balls enter the variable winning means in the open state as one round and this is repeated a specified number of times is generated. The winning or losing lottery is performed, and if a small hit is won in the winning or losing lottery, a small hit state is generated. It may be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state.

[Appendix]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  A. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the launch means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a win / fail lottery as to whether or not a hit state is generated is performed, and a win / fail lottery is displayed on the variable display means. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

  Further, as the starting prize winning means, for example, a first starting prize winning means capable of always entering a game ball and a second starting prize means capable of allowing a game ball to enter only when a predetermined open lottery is won. In the configuration provided with the start winning prize means, if it is not possible to win the open lottery and it is difficult for the first starting prize means to enter the game ball, it is relatively difficult to smoothly advance the game. At the same time, there is a concern that the image of the gaming machine will be degraded and the willingness to play the game will be significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, for example, by arranging the first start winning means and the second start winning means close to each other and increasing the chances of opening the second start winning means, for example, the first start winning means can be provided. Even if it is difficult for a game ball to enter, a configuration in which a game ball can easily enter the second start winning means and overall decrease in ease of entering the start winning means can be avoided. It is possible to adopt.

  However, in general, a pachinko machine is basically based on a game in which a game ball is launched aiming at a first starting winning means capable of always entering the game ball. For this reason, the impression as to whether or not the game ball easily enters the first start winning means tends to be stronger for the player. Therefore, by improving the ease of entering the second starting winning means, it is possible to compensate for the difficulty in making the game balls enter the first starting winning means (for example, the first starting winning means). (Even if the ease with which the game ball enters the ball is reduced, the ease with which the game ball enters the first and second starting winning means as a whole is comparable or improved.) However, in the case where it is still difficult to enter the game ball into the first start winning means and (almost) the state of not entering the ball is repeated, the impression on the game machine or the game hall where the game machine is installed is made. It is feared that it will worsen.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object the deterioration of an impression caused by a decrease in the ease with which game balls enter the first starting winning means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the above.

Means A-1-a. Firing means for firing a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
First start winning means in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
The game ball moving in the game area is configured to be able to change its state between an open state in which it can enter the ball and a closed state in which it cannot enter the ball or is difficult to enter the ball. A second starting winning means disposed downstream of the area);
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball having entered the first start winning means;
Second start winning detection means for detecting a game ball having entered the second start winning means;
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection unit or the second start winning detection unit, a win / fail lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and based on the result of the win / fail lottery. A main control means for generating the special gaming state,
A pre-covering means provided at a distance that allows a game ball to pass between the game board and the game board in the game area, and collectively covers at least the front of the first start winning means and the second start winning means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the means A-1-a, the first start winning means and the front covering means which covers the front of the second start winning means collectively are provided, so that the area around the first start winning means and the second start winning means is provided. , The visibility of the game ball that moves is relatively reduced, and it becomes difficult to determine whether the game ball has entered the first start winning means or the second start winning means. Therefore, the second starting winning means is set to be in an open state in such a balance that the time zone in which the player is likely to feel stress, such as not being able to receive a lottery even though the game ball is fired, is reduced. In the case where the player has just entered the game ball on the back side of the front covering means, the game ball enters either the first start winning means or the second start winning means, The game can be advanced as if a lottery was accepted. In other words, even if the ball entry rate of the game balls into the first start winning means is low, if the game balls enter the second start winning means relatively easily, the winning or losing lottery can be received constantly. Since there is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it is difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball has entered the first starting prize means or the second starting prize means. The user does not have to worry about whether the game ball easily enters the winning means. As a result, even if the ease of entry of the game ball into the first starting winning means is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression due to that, and to receive much stress. The game can proceed without any action.

  Further, by providing the front covering means, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the peripheral portions of the first start winning means and the second start winning means. In other words, if a game ball is launched aiming at the front covering means, a relatively easy-to-understand visual image can be obtained in which the player enters the ball in either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. In addition, more dynamic decoration and the like can be performed in the pre-covering means that collectively covers the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, and the design can be improved.

  In the pre-covering means, a part covering the first starting winning means and a part covering the second starting winning means may be formed integrally (integrally formed or united separately). , May be arranged adjacent to each other. In addition, "a part of the front covering means in which a game ball can pass through at least a game area behind the front covering means (for example, covers the front of a prize means such as a first start prize means and a second start prize means". (A part other than the part) is configured to have transparency (made of a transparent or translucent material, or form a slit, etc.) ". In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which a player or the like who plays a game for the first time becomes uneasy because he or she cannot see what is happening behind the front covering means. Further, for example, the pre-coating means may be used as a place for teaching predetermined information to a player. For example, the pre-covering means may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of success / failure lottery, etc.), or to display an image character or the like. In addition, the pre-covering means may be attached to the game board.

Means A-1-b. The first start winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the second start winning means,
The game nails erected on the front of the game board include a pair of life nails provided above the left and right sides of the winning opening of the first starting prize means, and pass between the pair of life nails. Game ball that has entered the first start winning means,
The gaming machine according to means A-1-a, wherein the front covering means is configured to also cover the front of the life nail.

  According to the means A-1-b, it is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize how the game ball enters the first starting winning means. Therefore, the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting winning means can be made to be performed based on various matters derived as a result of the game ball entering the first starting winning means. . As a result, it is possible to further promote a game that is not particular about the pace at which game balls enter the first starting winning means.

Means A-2-a. The second start winning means includes a blade member that can be displaced between an open position that allows game balls to enter the second start winning means and a closed position that restricts the game balls,
The means A, wherein the pre-covering means is provided so as to cover at least a part of the blade member in the closed position and a front part of the blade member in the open position. A gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the means A-2, the second starting prize means is in an open state in which the wing member is set to the open position, thereby allowing a game ball moving in the game area to enter, and the wing member is set to the closed position. As a result, a closed state is set in which the entry of game balls is restricted.

  In addition, "the second start winning means receives a game ball moving in the game area, and moves the ball receiving section for guiding the game area to the outside of the game area, and moves the game area beside the ball receiving section. Between the open position for guiding the game ball to the ball receiving portion to the ball receiving portion, and the closed position for restricting the movement of the game ball moving in the game area beside the ball receiving portion toward the ball receiving portion. And a displaceable blade member. " In addition, the front covering means constitutes a part of the starting winning means (for example, a front wall of a ball receiving portion which receives a game ball moving in the game area and guides the ball toward an opening formed in the game board). It may be.

Means A-2-b. The pre-covering means includes a first object display unit that models a first object,
The blade member (a pseudo blade member corresponding to a unit A-3-b described later) includes a second object display unit that models a second object,
By setting the blade member (a pseudo blade member corresponding to the unit A-3-b) to the open position (a functional position corresponding to the unit A-3-b), the second object Is in a completed display state in which it forms a third object together with the first object,
By setting the blade member (a pseudo blade member corresponding to the unit A-3-b) to the closed position (a standby position corresponding to the unit A-3-b), the second object 32. The gaming machine according to means A-2-a, wherein an incomplete display state is provided in which the entirety or most of the object is hidden behind the first object.

  According to the means A-2-b, the first object display section is provided for the front covering means, and the wing member (a pseudo wing member corresponding to the means A-3-b described later) is provided. When the opening position is reached, a second object display unit that displays a second object in which the third object is modeled together with the first object is provided, so that the third object that partially moves with the operation of the blade member can be used. While collecting the line of sight, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front covering means, and to reduce the player's interest in the appearance of the game ball entering the starting winning means. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting winning means is further enhanced.

  Means A-2-c. The tip of the blade member (the pseudo blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b) in the open position is located outside the outer peripheral edge of the pre-coating means. A gaming machine according to the means A-2-a or A-2-b.

  According to the means A-2-c, it is easy to recognize that the blade member has been displaced to the open position (corresponding to the means A-3-b, that the pseudo blade member has been displaced to the functional position). it can.

  Means A-2-d-1. It is arranged in front of the blade member, and includes an open covering means for covering the front of the blade member in the open position, and a closing covering means for covering the front of the blade member in the closed position. A gaming machine according to the means A-2-a.

  According to the means A-2-d-1, the blade members at the closed position and the open position are hidden, so that it is difficult to determine whether the blade member is at the open position or the closed position.

Means A-2-d-2. The pre-covering means includes an object display unit that models a predetermined object,
The object display unit includes an opening covering unit as the opening covering unit that covers the front of the blade member at the open position, and an opening covering unit that covers the front of the blade member at the closing position. The gaming machine according to means A-2-d-1, comprising: a closing cover portion.

  According to the means A-2-d-2, by providing an object display portion to the front covering means, while collecting the line of sight to the front covering means, the visibility of the back side of the front covering means is reduced, or the start is started. It is possible to reduce the player's interest in how the game ball enters the winning means. In addition, since the blade member is hidden by the covering portion at the time of opening or the covering portion at the time of closing, it is difficult to grasp which of the open position and the closed position. In addition, by using the displacement of the blade member as the object display unit, it is possible to derive a mode as if the object is moving (due to the afterimage effect).

Means A-2-e. The first start winning means is arranged on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the second start winning means,
The game nails erected on the front of the game board include a pair of life nails provided above the left and right sides of the winning opening of the first starting prize means, and pass between the pair of life nails. Game ball that has entered the first start winning means,
The means A- characterized in that the object display section of the front covering means has an index section at a position near the pair of life nails, which indicates an appropriate position of (the head of) the life nail. The gaming machine according to any of 2-b to A-2-d.

  According to the means A-2-e, by comparing the pair of left and right life nails with the index portion, it is possible to accurately and quickly determine whether the distance between the life nails is wide or narrow. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to relatively judge whether or not maintenance is required for the nail, or when the distance between the nails is narrow compared to the index portion, the player can make a decision on himself / herself. The game can be avoided so as not to be disadvantaged. As a result, the distance between the life nails can be made as constant as possible, and variation in the ease of entry of the game balls into the first starting winning means can be reduced for each game machine. In particular, since the index portion is provided in the front covering means, it is close to the tip (head) of the life nail, whereby the inclination of the life nail can be grasped more reliably.

Means A-3-a. At least a part of the pre-coating means has transparency,
In a state where the blade member is in the closed position, a pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member is in the open position (a position other than the closed position) is provided. The gaming machine according to means A-2.

  If the blade member is in the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the second starting winning means. For this reason, the player who has recognized that the blade member is at the closed position tends to shift his eyes to the first starting winning means and observe whether or not the game ball enters the first starting winning means. .

  In this regard, according to the means A-3-a, a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member is at the open position is derived even if it is not the timing for opening the second starting winning means. Thus, it is possible to increase the chance that a predetermined action related to the blade member occurs from the visual recognition mode in which the second start winning unit is in the closed state. Therefore, if the player interested in opening the second start winning means is in the open state, and recognizes that some action has occurred in the second start winning means in the closed state, the second start winning means is activated. It is also conceivable to turn the gaze to the second starting winning means to determine that the opening state has been set. However, in practice, the pseudo-blade opening mode may be a pseudo-blade opening mode, and the pseudo-blade opening mode is a mode in which the blade member is present in the open position. It is possible to distinguish whether the blade member is in the open position by simply looking or entering the end of the field of view, or whether the blade member is in the closed position only by deriving the pseudo blade open mode. Difficult or, for a moment, misunderstand that the blade member is displaced to the open position.

  As described above, the pseudo-blade opening mode is merely to make it appear as if the blade member has been opened. With this, the blade member appears to be opened. When there is no sign of entering the ball, the entering state of the game ball of the second starting winning means does not always match the appearance of the second starting winning means. Then, if the pseudo feather releasing mode is repeated to some extent, if the game balls are constantly entering the second start winning means and the like and there is no delay in the game (the game balls do not enter the start winning means too much). (Unless a disadvantageous game is forced due to the above), it is possible to reach a situation where the user does not care much about whether or not the blade member has been opened. As a result, even if the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting winning means is reduced, the operational effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to that is further enhanced. Will be played.

  Further, by the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing when the second start winning unit is opened (or closed). Therefore, the difference between the advanced player who can play a game such that the game ball is fired only when the second start winning means is opened and the game ball can enter, and the novice player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by utilizing the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to perform an effect involving the opening and closing of the blade member, or an effect as a mere buzz regardless of the opening and closing of the blade member. In addition, during the progress of the game, the pseudo feather opening mode becomes a part of the game scenery, and the game becomes an accent / buzz or a rhythm (it feels lonely when it disappears), which can enhance the interest.

  In a state where the pseudo blade opening mode is derived (for example, a state in which a pseudo blade member described later is in the functional position), the blade member in the closed position is positioned whether or not the blade member is in the closed position. It is desirable to be configured so that the change in the visual recognition mode of the place where the operation is performed is reduced. For example, a cover may be provided to cover the front of the blade member (and the pseudo blade member) in the closed position, or when the blade member is displaced to the open position corresponding to the rear position of the blade member in the closed position. You may comprise so that it may become visually recognizable and the design imitating (the front shape of the blade member) may be given. In this case, it is more difficult to determine whether the pseudo blade opening mode is only derived or whether the blade member is actually in the open position (whether the blade member is in the closed position). The function and effect provided by the means are further enhanced.

Means A-3-b-1. The pseudo blade opening means is disposed in front of the blade member, and is capable of covering the front of the blade member in the open position and the functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member in the closed position. Equipped with a pseudo blade member that can be displaced between the standby position,
When the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, a game ball is configured to be able to pass through the game area behind the pseudo blade member. The gaming machine according to A-3-a.

  According to the means A-3-b-1, the pseudo vane opening mode can be more realistically derived. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo blade opening means imitating the mode of the blade member behind the blade member. In this case, since the pseudo blade opening means is disposed relatively behind, the pseudo There is a concern that the blade opening means becomes difficult to see even if the pseudo blade opening mode is set. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball passes in front of the pseudo blade opening means in the pseudo blade opening mode. As a result, there is a possibility that it is instantaneously grasped that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this regard, the provision of the pseudo blade member in front of the blade member can eliminate the above concern.

  Further, since the pseudo blade member can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member is kept in the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced without inviting more game balls to the second starting winning means than necessary. The operation mode (for example, the mode in which the character operates when the pseudo-blade member is part of the character display, the mode in which the second start winning means is opened / closed (delicately), etc.) is sufficiently used for production and the like. Can be.

  Incidentally, the shape of the pseudo blade member is not limited to a plate shape, for example, a square frame shape that can be opened in the displacement direction of the pseudo blade member and accommodate the blade member inside, or the square frame shape It may be configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section with a part cut away. Regarding the means A-2-c, the pseudo blade member in the functional position may protrude outward from the outer edge of the front covering means. In other words, while making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member, it is easy to understand the location of the pseudo blade member so that the effect using the pseudo blade member can be recognized, while paying attention to the opening and closing of the blade member. It is possible to have the game proceed while restraining the game from being performed.

  Means A-3-b-2. The method according to (A-3-b-1, wherein the pseudo blade opening unit also displaces the pseudo blade member to the functional position when the blade member is displaced to the open position. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A-3-b-2, a mode in which the blade member is viewed from the front when the blade member is in the open position, and a case where the pseudo blade member is in the functional position although the blade member is in the closed position. The appearance of the pseudo blade member when viewed from the front can be the same (in both cases, the pseudo blade member at the functional position is visually recognized). Therefore, the reality of the pseudo vane opening mode can be further increased. In addition, in the case of employing this configuration, it is not necessary to make the front side of the blade member the same as that of the pseudo blade member. You don't have to do it. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the blade member, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member, the figure or the like rubs with the pseudo blade member, and the design is deteriorated. Can be prevented.

  Means A-3-b-3. The means A-, wherein the blade member and the pseudo blade member are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member extend on the same straight line. The gaming machine according to 3-b-1 or A-3-b-2.

  According to the means A-3-b-3, the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member can be relatively easily synchronized. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member is being displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member to cover the front of the blade member. Therefore, operational effects such as making the location of the blade member difficult to understand can be further achieved. The pseudo shaft connected to the pseudo blade member may be inserted inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft connected to the blade member. In this case, the rotation axes of the blade member and the pseudo blade member can be relatively easily extended on the same straight line.

  Means A-3-b-4. The blade member presses the pseudo blade member when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and displaces the pseudo blade member from the standby position to the functional position. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-3, comprising:

  According to the means A-3-b-4, when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and when the blade member is driven first (mainly), the pseudo blade member follows the driving. Become. For this reason, it is avoided that each operates independently, and it is possible to synchronize and move the blade member and the pseudo blade member as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the functional position are shifted, and the blade member is displaced to the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is displaced to the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is easy to understand whether or not it is just the case.

  In the case where the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the standby position to the functional position, the blade-side driving means for operating the blade member, and the pseudo blade The blade-side driving means of the pseudo-side driving means for operating the member may be driven.

  Means A-3-b-5. The pseudo-blade member presses the blade member when the pseudo-blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, and the pseudo-side pressing displaces the blade member from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-4, comprising:

  According to the means A-3-b-5, when the pseudo blade member is driven first (mainly) when the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the blade member follows the pseudo blade member. Become. For this reason, it is avoided that each operates independently, and it is possible to synchronize and move the blade member and the pseudo blade member as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the closed position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the standby position are shifted, and whether the blade member is in the open position or only the pseudo blade member is in the functional position This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which it is easy to understand whether or not the information only exists.

  When the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, the blade-side driving means for operating the blade member, and the pseudo blade The pseudo-side driving unit of the pseudo-side driving unit for operating the member may be driven.

  Means A-3-b-6. The means A-3-b, wherein the blade member is made of a material that is colorless and transparent or has a hue similar to the color of a member located behind the blade member in the open position. A gaming machine according to any one of A-1 to A-3-b-5.

  According to the means A-3-b-6, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the blade member (it is difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member). Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further achieved.

Means A-3-b-7. Sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Opening / closing control of the second start winning means is executed by the main control means,
The means for controlling the driving of the pseudo blade opening means is executed by the sub-control means (corresponding to information on opening and closing of the second starting winning means from the main control means). The gaming machine according to b-1 to A-3-b-6.

  According to the means A-3-b-7, the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

Means A-3-b-8. The pseudo blade opening means,
When the blade member at the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member at the standby position is displaced to the functional position,
When the blade member in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo blade member in the functional position is displaced to the functional position,
Prior to the process of displacing the blade member to the open position, the main control unit outputs to the sub-control unit opening schedule information indicating that the blade member is displaced to the open position.
The gaming machine according to (A-3-b-7), wherein the sub-control unit displaces the pseudo wing member to the standby position when receiving the opening schedule information.

  According to the means A-3-b-8, when the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member is already in the functional position, and the blade member being displaced is replaced by the pseudo blade member. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the cover cannot be provided.

Means A-3-b-9. The pseudo blade member has a larger front surface area than the blade member,
When the blade member is at the open position and the pseudo blade member is at the functional position, the side of the pseudo blade member closer to the standby position than the surface of the blade member on the closed position side. Is located on the closed position side,
When the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the standby position, the side of the pseudo blade member closer to the functional position than the surface of the blade member on the open position side. The gaming machine according to the means A-3-b-7 or the means A-3-b-8, which is located on the open position side.

  When the opening / closing control of the blade member and the drive control of the pseudo blade member are performed by different control means, there is a possibility that the operation start timing of the blade member and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member are slightly shifted. In this regard, according to the means A-3-b-9, the operation direction side of the operable blade member is configured to be extraly covered with the pseudo blade member, and the blade member is displaced slightly ahead of time. Even if it does, it will fall within the range covered by the pseudo blade member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vane member from being easily displaced or not, and to prevent the operation of the vane member from deviating from the operation of the pseudo vane member to cause a deterioration in design. it can.

Means A-3-b-10. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged below a central portion of the game board,
At least the blade member is in the open position, and when the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the upper side of the pseudo blade member disposed forward of the blade member is higher than the upper surface of the blade member. The gaming machine according to means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-9, wherein the gaming machine is also configured to be positioned above.

  In general, when a player plays a gaming machine, the positional relationship is such that the face of the player faces the center of the gaming board. When the wing member and the pseudo wing member are disposed below the center of the game board, the player's line of sight to the wing member and the pseudo wing member faces diagonally downward (the wing member and the pseudo wing member are oblique). (Looking from above). For this reason, even if the blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged before and after, there is a concern that the distinction between the blade member and the pseudo blade member may be instantaneously made.

  On the other hand, according to the means A-3-b-10, since the upper side of the pseudo blade member at the functional position is located above the upper surface of the blade member at the open position, the blade at the open position The pseudo-blade member in the member and the functional position can be disposed so as to overlap as much as possible when viewed from the upper front. Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further achieved.

Means A-3-c-1. The pseudo blade opening means,
A pseudo-open object provided at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the blade member at the open position, and simulating the blade member at the open position;
The gaming machine according to means A-3-a or A-3-b, further comprising: a simulation light source configured to irradiate the pseudo open object with light.

  According to the means A-3-c-1, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade opening mode while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Incidentally, a pseudo blade member as described in the means A-3-b may be used in combination.

  Means A-3-c-2. At least a part of the pre-coating means is configured as a light guide plate, and light is incident from an end to the light guide plate by the pseudo light source, whereby the blade member in the open position of the light guide plate is The gaming machine according to means A-3-c-1, wherein the pseudo open object is configured to emerge at a position covering the front.

  According to the means A-3-c-2, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived in the pre-coating means, and the visibility of the pseudo blade opening mode can be improved. In addition, in the pre-covering means, the pseudo blade opening mode can be visually recognized only when the dummy light source emits light.

  Means A-3-c-3. The pseudo open object is provided at a position (on a base plate for attaching the second starting winning means to the game board) which is covered by the blade member at the open position. A gaming machine according to the means A-3-c-1 or A-3-c-2.

  According to the means A-3-c-3, the pseudo blade opening mode can be derived with a relatively simple configuration behind the blade member (base plate).

Means A-3-c-4. The blade member (when the configuration of the means A-3-b is used in combination, the “pseudo blade member”) includes a light emitting unit that can be viewed from the front,
The pseudo open object of the pseudo blade opening means is formed at least by imitating the light emitting means. The method according to any one of means A-3-c-1 to A-3-c-3. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A-3-c-4, the wing member (pseudo wing member) is visually recognized as if it emits light, so that the wing member is in the open position and the pseudo open object. In addition, it is possible to more strongly connect the pseudo-blade opening mode by the pseudo-blade opening means using the pseudo light source (it is confused as to which one is intuitive at a glance). Further, it is also possible to simplify the configuration (shape) of the pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means (it is sufficient to imitate only the light-emitting means, not the whole, to achieve a sufficiently pseudo-form).

Means A-3-c-5. The pseudo open object is not only a position overlapping the blade member in the open position in the front-back direction, but also a position overlapping the blade member in the closed position in the front-back direction, and a position overlapping the blade member in the open position. It is also provided at a position between the overlapping position,
The simulated light source is configured to be capable of sequentially irradiating light to each of the simulated open objects, in any one of means A-3-c-1 to A-3-c-4. The described gaming machine.

  According to the means A-3-c-5, it is also possible to derive a mode that simulates the manner in which the blade member opens and closes. Therefore, it is possible to derive more realistic and various pseudo blade opening modes.

  Means A-4-a. When the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means performs detection, a ball detection corresponding display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection can be derived. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-3, further comprising:

  According to the means A-4-a, the first start winning means or the second start winning means or the second start winning means can be visually recognized even if the first start winning means and the second start winning means are not directly viewed. It is possible (or rather easy) to know that a game ball enters the start winning means and that the right to win or not is obtained. Therefore, the chance of directly visually recognizing the starting prize winning means is reduced, and even if the ball entry rate to the first starting prize winning means is relatively low, the overall ball entry rate to the first and second starting prize winning means is reduced. If it is not low, the player may not be concerned about whether the game ball enters the first start winning means or the second start winning means. Will not go into a situation). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress a situation in which the game ball does not readily enter the first start winning means, thereby causing a decrease in interest. On the other hand, even if it becomes somewhat difficult to see how the game ball enters the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means, it is still possible to determine whether or not the game ball has hit the ball. , It is possible to give a sense of security to the player.

Means A-4-b-1. In the covered area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the front covering means, a pseudo prize detecting means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
The game according to the means A-4-a, wherein a pseudo prize mode as if the start prize detection means is detected is derived based on the detection by the pseudo prize detection means. Machine.

  According to the means A-4-b-1, in the covered area where the front is covered by the front covering means, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the start winning means. That is, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively reduced by the provision of the pre-covering means, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, Deriving a pseudo prize mode in which a game ball that has entered the covered area on the back side may have entered the starting prize winning means (for example, detection of a pseudo prize detecting means installed in the covered area similarly to the starting prize means) Derives the same reaction as when the start prize detecting means is detected, and if it derives, suggests whether the reaction is due to the detection of the start prize detecting means, etc.) Can be. Therefore, as an action of the game ball with respect to the starting winning prize means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern of "may have entered" can be added, and the production opportunity and It is possible to increase the types of the effects and diversify the effects. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means by providing the front covering means (drafting whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means). And can improve the interest.

  The false winning detection means may be provided on the downstream side of the first start winning means and the second start winning means, or may be provided on the upstream side of the first start winning means and the second start winning means. The first start winning means and the second start winning means may be provided on one downstream side and on the other upstream side. When the pseudo prize detecting means is located on the upstream side of the first starting prize detecting means or the second starting prize detecting means, the game ball detected by the pseudo prize detecting means is transmitted to the first starting prize detecting means or the second starting prize receiving means. It may be configured to be able to enter the ball, or may be configured to be unable to enter the ball. Examples of the pseudo prize mode include a display mode on a predetermined display unit, a voice mode by a voice output unit, a light-emitting mode by a predetermined light-emitting unit, and a combination thereof. Further, as a pseudo prize mode, for example, when the first start prize unit, the second start prize unit, and the pseudo prize detection unit perform detection, the ball detection corresponding display unit displays the ball detection corresponding display. As a pre-stage, a mode (including a pseudo-winning mode) in which the right to win the lottery may have been obtained is derived, and thereafter, detection is performed by the first starting winning mode and the second starting winning mode. Derives a mode (incoming ball detection correspondence display) indicating that the right to receive the winning lottery is obtained, and if the detection is performed by the pseudo winning detection means, the right to receive the winning lottery is not obtained. An effect such as deriving an aspect indicating the fact can be performed.

  Means A-4-b-2. In the case where the detection by the pseudo winning detection unit is performed, the display unit corresponding to the incoming ball detection displays the display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection in a different form from the display corresponding to the input ball detection ( The gaming machine according to A-4-b-1, characterized in that a pseudo hold icon) can be derived.

  In the configuration in which the ball entry detection corresponding display is displayed if a game ball enters the start winning means, even if the state of the ball entering the start winning means of the game ball is made difficult to see by the front covering means, At the point in time when the ball entry detection corresponding display is not displayed, it is immediately grasped that the game ball has not entered the start winning unit. In this regard, as in the means A-4-b-2, by enabling display of the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display, even at the timing when the ball-in detection detection corresponding display is displayed, the game ball still serves as the start winning means. It is possible to postpone knowing the result of whether or not a ball has been entered, and to perform an effect such as one of a display corresponding to the detection of a detected ball and a display corresponding to the detection of a pseudo ball. Therefore, the effect of determining whether or not a game ball has entered the start winning means can be made more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode (the effect of whether the game ball has entered the starting prize winning means), and to improve the interest.

  In addition, "when the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is detected while the pseudo ball detection corresponding display is displayed, the pseudo ball detection corresponding display is displayed. Instead, the configuration may be such that the display corresponding to the incoming ball detection can be derived. " In this case, the visual recognition mode of the area where the incoming ball detection corresponding display and the pseudo incoming ball detection corresponding display are displayed can be made relatively simple. Further, it may be configured such that “the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed”. In other words, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display is displayed forever and the role of the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display becomes difficult to understand.

  Means A-4-b-3. When the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is detected, the pseudo ball detection is performed before deriving a corresponding ball detection display (final hold icon) corresponding to the detection. The gaming machine according to means A-4-b-2, wherein a precursor display (temporary hold icon) having the same mode as the corresponding display (pseudo hold icon) can be derived.

  According to the means A-4-b-3, when the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display or the precursor display is displayed, the pleasure of whether or not this is changed to the ball-in detection detection display is ensured, and the ball-in detection is performed. It is possible to clarify the difference between the mode of the corresponding display and the pseudo ball detection corresponding display (to make it easy to understand that the pseudo ball detection corresponding display is not the ball detection corresponding display). In other words, if the ball-entry detection corresponding display and the pseudo ball-entry detection corresponding display are closely looked at, they differ, but if they are in the same or indistinguishable form, the player may It is possible to avoid a situation in which the display for ball detection is assumed to be the display for ball entry detection to the last, and a feeling of distrust is given.

Means A-4-b-4. Variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
In the variable display means, display control means for variably displaying the identification information, after a predetermined time, to stop and display the identification information based on the result of the winning / rejection lottery,
Information acquisition means for acquiring information used for the winning / failure lottery when the first start prize detection means and the second start prize detection means are detected;
The information acquired by the information acquisition means, comprising a plurality of hold storage means capable of storing a plurality of up to a predetermined number,
When the first start winning detection unit and the second start winning detection unit are detected during the change display of the identification information on the variable display unit, the change display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is displayed. , Is performed after the display of the change of the identification information during execution,
The mode of the ball-incidence detection corresponding display of the ball-inclusion detection corresponding display means is determined based on information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the hold storage means. The gaming machine according to 4-b-3.

  According to the means A-4-b-4, it is possible to perform more various effects using the display for detecting the input ball and the display for detecting the pseudo-input ball. For example, if a predetermined type of pseudo ball detection corresponding display is derived based on the detection of the first start winning detection unit and the second start winning detection unit, and this is changed to the ball detection corresponding display, Thus, it is possible to perform a suggestive effect such as an increase in the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state. In the state where the number of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the holding storage means has reached the upper limit, even if the false prize detection means performs detection, the pseudo entry ball Do not derive the detection correspondence display. "

  Means A-4-b-5. When the pseudo ball detection detection display is displayed, the additional display in a mode different from the pseudo ball detection detection display is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the pseudo ball detection corresponding display. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-4-b-2 to A-4-b-4.

  According to the means A-4-b-5, the form of the pseudo ball detection corresponding display is not determined at least in part because the form of the pseudo ball detection corresponding display is at least partially unclear. As a result, it is possible to strongly give an impression that there is a possibility that the pseudo-ball-in detection display is likely to change further. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player confuses the pseudo ball-in detection display with the ball-in detection display, and mistakes the pseudo ball-in detection display as the ball-in detection display. Trouble that may occur in (for example, only the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display is performed, but the process that can be executed when the ball-in detection corresponding display is performed by misunderstanding this as the ball-in detection corresponding display Troubles, such as the fact that is not executed, can be suppressed. In addition, "when the additional display is derived also to the precursor display", "instead of the precursor display, when the incoming ball detection corresponding display is derived, it corresponds to the pseudo incoming ball detection corresponding display. The additional display that has been displayed on the display may be deleted. "

  Means A-4-b-6. Detection history storage means capable of storing the detection histories (time of each detection) of the first start prize detection means and the second start prize detection means and the detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo prize detection means are provided. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-5, wherein information stored in the detection history storage means can be output.

  According to the means A-4-b-6, by recognizing the pseudo prize mode, the player misunderstands that the game ball has entered the starting prize means (for example, when the player enters the pseudo prize). In the unlikely event that a trouble occurs due to misunderstanding of the ball detection corresponding display with the incoming ball detection corresponding display, etc., data for explaining the circumstances can be reliably obtained (for example, it can be displayed by variable display means, etc. Or send it to a hall computer), and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the trouble is broken.

Means A-4-b-7. Sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-6, wherein the false winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub control means.

  According to the means A-4-b-7, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control means by minimizing the number of information input to the main control means and the number of components for inputting information to the main control means. In addition, it is possible to suppress improper operation on the main control means.

Means A-4-b-8. There is a state where the detection by the start winning detection unit is effective as a trigger of the winning / wrong lottery, and an invalid state,
In a state in which the detection by the starting winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means covered with the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is valid,
Any of the means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-7, wherein the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. The gaming machine described in Crab.

  According to the means A-4-b-8, in a state where the display for detecting the incoming ball detection should not be displayed, the display for displaying the pseudo incoming ball detection is displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation where the user is clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the appearance of the pseudo-incoming ball detection corresponding display is unnecessarily derived and causes a decrease in interest.

  Means A-5. In the game area, in the covering area whose front is covered by the front covering means, or in a position adjacent or close to the downstream side of the covering area, (corresponding to the means A-2-a, A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-4, further comprising: a course changing means for changing a traveling direction of the game ball at a position below the blade member in the open position. .

  For example, if a game ball enters the covering area and the blade member is in the open position, even if the game ball reaches a guide point guided by the blade member to the starting winning means (ball receiving portion), the blade member is not moved. When in the closed position, the game ball naturally flows down the game area without being guided by the blade member, and is discharged to the outside of the covering area. At this time, when the trajectory of the game ball incident on the covered area and the trajectory of the game ball after being ejected from the covered area extend substantially in a straight line, the game ball incident on the covered area just before the first starting prize. It is immediately recognized as having been discharged from the covered area without entering the means and the second starting winning means.

  In this regard, the provision of the course changing means in the covered area as in the means A-5 changes the traveling direction of the game ball in the covered area or delays the traveling speed of the game ball. It is difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the area. Therefore, it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to an easily visible place, and the game ball is provided with the first start prize means or the second start prize means. You can create more situations where you may or may not have entered the ball.

  In particular, in response to the means A-4-b-2, the detection of the incoming ball is performed rather than directly checking the first starting prize means and the second starting prize means to confirm whether or not the game ball has entered. It is possible to make it easy to shift to a game such as confirming a ball entry into the first start winning unit and the second start winning unit by the ball entry detection corresponding display of the corresponding display unit. For this reason, by visually recognizing the state in which the game ball does not easily enter the first starting winning means, it is possible to suppress concentration of the effect on the effect and accumulation of stress, and the like, and the whereabouts of the game involving the effect Can be immersed.

  In addition, corresponding to the above-mentioned means A-4-b-1, "the course changing means includes pseudo winning award guidance means for guiding the game ball moving in the covered area to the pseudo winning detection means. ". In this case, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo prize detecting means. For example, although the pseudo prize detecting means is provided, it has to be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass much due to an installation space or the like. And a situation in which it hardly functions can be avoided. Furthermore, the time lag from when the game ball enters the covered area to when it is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the start winning means is longer, and the game ball that has entered the covered area, The effect of making the correspondence with the game balls discharged from the covered area ambiguous is more remarkably exhibited.

Means A-6-a. At least a part of the pre-coating means is provided so as to be displaceable,
Decoration drive means for displacing the front covering means is provided,
The decoration drive means may be configured to be drivable based on the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means, wherein any of the means A-1 to A-5 is provided. The described gaming machine.

  According to the means A-6-a, the operation of the pre-covering means makes it possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize means or the second starting prize means. The game can be advanced with a relatively sense of security without confirming that the game ball directly enters the two-start winning means. As a result, attention can be paid to an effect or the like that teaches the result of the success / failure lottery.

  In addition, it may be configured that “the front covering means is configured to be displaceable in a similar manner regardless of whether the first starting winning detection means or the second starting winning detection means is detected”. Further, in correspondence with the means A-4-b-1, "the configuration is such that the decoration driving means can be driven even when the pseudo winning detection means is detected". Good.

  Means A-6-b. The means A-6-a is characterized in that the front covering means is configured to be displaceable based on the contact of the game ball with the front covering means even when the decoration driving means is not driven. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A-6-b, it is possible to add interest to the operation of the pre-coating means. Furthermore, since the front covering means is displaced only by the collision of the game balls with the front covering means, the beginner player has almost always expected that the game balls entered the starting winning means. Can be carried.

  In the non-driving state of the decoration driving means, the link mechanism for interlocking the decoration driving means and the front covering means is not engaged. In the non-driving state of the decoration driving means, the front covering means is supported by the elastic body. It is good also as being comprised so that it may be performed. In addition, the link mechanism for linking the decoration driving means and the front covering means transmits the driving force of the decoration driving means to the front covering means via the elastic means (for example, the front covering means is pivotally supported). A part of the shaft portion may be configured as a coil spring).

Means A-7-a. A first winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the first start winning detecting means,
A second winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the second start winning detecting means,
A sound effect generating unit that can generate the first winning effect sound and the mixed winning effect sound close to the second winning effect sound;
The sound effect generating means,
Generating the first winning effect sound (or the mixed winning effect sound; when used as an effect) based on the detection of the first start winning detecting means;
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, wherein the second winning effect sound or the mixed winning effect sound is generated based on the detection of the second start winning detecting means.

  According to the means A-7-a, even if the starting winning means is not directly visually recognized, it is possible to confirm the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means by the sound effect, and the game proceeds more smoothly. be able to. The confusion winning effect sound may be created separately from the first winning effect sound and the second winning effect sound, or may be configured by outputting the first winning effect sound and the second winning effect sound simultaneously. Good. Furthermore, in response to the means A-4-b-1, it is also possible to "generate the mixed prize effect sound even when the pseudo prize detection means is detected". In this case, the effect that the game ball may have entered the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means can be made more realistic.

Means A-7-b. A ball entry ratio discriminating unit that compares the number of detections of the first start winning detection unit per predetermined period with the number of detections of the second start winning detection unit,
When the ratio of the number of detections of the first start winning detection unit to the number of detections of the second start winning detection unit is equal to or less than a specified value, the sound effect generating unit sets the second start The gaming machine according to means A-7-a, wherein the mixed prize effect sound is generated based on the detection of the prize detecting means.

  According to the means A-7-b, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given an impression that the game balls have not entered the first starting winning means so much.

  B. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the launch means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a win / fail lottery as to whether or not a hit state is generated is performed, and a win / fail lottery is displayed on the variable display means. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

  Further, as start-up winning means, there is an opening-and-closing start-winning means which is in an open state in which a game ball can be inserted only when a predetermined open lottery is won. By the way, in general, the effect for teaching the result of the open lottery as to whether or not the openable start winning means is to be in the open state is performed, but as the openable start winning means itself, according to the open lottery. Just opening and closing, it was not interesting.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a novel opening / closing start winning mechanism.

Means B-1. Firing means for firing a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
Opening / closing start winning means configured to be able to change the state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which entry is impossible or difficult to enter,
Start winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the openable start winning means,
A main control unit for performing a winning / non-passing lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the start winning prize detecting unit, and generating the special gaming state based on the result of the winning / rejecting lottery A gaming machine comprising:
The opening / closing start winning unit, in a configuration including a blade member that can be displaced between an open position that allows a ball to enter the open / close start winning unit and a closed position that regulates the ball,
In a state where the blade member is in the closed position, a pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo blade opening mode as if the blade member is in the open position (a position other than the closed position) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the means B-1, a pseudo-blade opening mode as if the blade member is at the open position is derived, not at the timing when the opening / closing type start winning means is opened. Thus, it is possible to increase the chance that a predetermined action related to the blade member occurs from the visual recognition mode in which the openable start winning mechanism is in the closed state. In other words, in addition to "open" and "closed", a mode "may be open" can be added as the visual recognition mode of the openable start winning mechanism. Therefore, the opening / closing type start prize winning means becomes more versatile. In addition, the effect involving the opening and closing of the blade member and the suggestion of other states (the suggestion of the game mode to stay, , The result of the fluctuation display, etc.), or simply as a lively event regardless of the opening and closing of the blade members. As a result, it is possible to mount a novel opening / closing start winning award means capable of diversifying the production performance and the game performance, etc., thereby improving the interest and the like.

  Further, by the pseudo blade opening mode, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing when the opening / closing start winning means is opened (or closed). Therefore, the difference between an advanced player who can perform a game such that the game ball is fired only when the game ball can enter when the opening / closing type start winning means is opened, and a beginner player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, for example, when the blade member is in the closed position, since the game ball cannot enter the opening / closing start winning unit, a normal start moving winning unit capable of always entering the game ball is provided separately. In this case, a game ball is launched aiming at the always-start dynamic winning means. Here, in a case where it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the always-starting dynamic winning means, there is a concern that the image of the gaming machine may be degraded and the willingness to play the game may be significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, by increasing the chance that the opening / closing start prize means is opened, even if the game ball does not easily enter the always-start moving prize means, the open / close start prize means includes the game ball. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration that makes it easier to enter the ball and prevents the overall ease of entering the start winning means from being reduced.

  However, in general, a pachinko machine is basically based on a game in which a game ball is launched aiming at a constantly-starting dynamic prize means capable of always entering the game ball. For this reason, the impression as to whether or not the game ball easily enters the always-start dynamic winning means tends to be stronger for the player. Accordingly, by improving the ease of entering the open / close start-up prize means, it is possible to compensate for the difficulty in making the game ball enter the always-start dynamic prize means (even if the normally-start dynamic prize means). Even if the ease of entry of the game ball into the ball is reduced, the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting winning means as a whole is comparable or even improved.) When it is difficult to enter the game ball into the always-starting dynamic prize winning means, and (almost) does not enter the ball, the impression of the game machine or the game hall where the game machine is installed is deteriorated. Is concerned.

  Therefore, the means B-1 states that "provided a pseudo-blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo-blade opening mode as if the blade member were at the open position". For this reason, even if the blade member is in the closed position, if the pseudo blade opening mode is derived, the player is more interested in the openable start winning award than the always-start moving winning award. Can be pulled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game ball does not easily enter the constantly-starting dynamic prize means, thereby causing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the pseudo-blade opening mode is merely to make it appear as if the blade member has been opened.Thus, the blade member appears to be opened, but the game ball enters the openable start winning mechanism. When there is no sign, the state of entering the game ball of the opening / closing start winning means does not always match the appearance of the open / close start winning means. Then, if the pseudo feather opening mode is repeated to some extent, if the game balls are constantly entering the open / close type start winning means and the like and there is no delay in the game (the game balls do not enter the start winning means too much). If the player is not forced to play disadvantageously due to the above), it is possible to reach a state in which the mode of the blade member and the mode of opening the pseudo blade are not particularly bothered. As a result, even if the ease of entry of the game ball into the always-starting dynamic prize means is reduced, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to that is further enhanced. Will be played.

  In a state where the pseudo blade opening mode is derived (for example, a state in which a pseudo blade member described later is in the functional position), the blade member in the closed position is positioned whether or not the blade member is in the closed position. It is desirable to be configured so that the change in the visual recognition mode of the place where the operation is performed is reduced. For example, a cover may be provided to cover the front of the blade member (and the pseudo blade member) in the closed position, or when the blade member is displaced to the open position corresponding to the rear position of the blade member in the closed position. You may comprise so that it may become visually recognizable and the design imitating (the front shape of the blade member) may be given. In this case, it is more difficult to determine whether the pseudo blade opening mode is only derived or whether the blade member is actually in the open position (whether the blade member is in the closed position). The function and effect provided by the means are further enhanced. The opening / closing start winning means of the present means B-1 is constituted by the second starting winning device 33b and the pseudo blade member 431, corresponding to the main embodiment described above.

  The opening / closing start winning means receives a game ball moving in the game area and guides the ball area to the outside of the game area, and moves the game area beside the ball area. Between the open position for guiding the game ball to the ball receiving portion to the ball receiving portion, and the closed position for restricting the movement of the game ball moving in the game area beside the ball receiving portion toward the ball receiving portion. And a displaceable blade member. "

Means B-2-a. In the game area, provided with a distance that allows a game ball to pass between the game board and the game board, comprising a front covering means for covering at least the front of the openable start winning means,
The front covering means is provided so as to cover at least a part of the blade member at the closed position, and a part of the blade member at the open position, and
The gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein at least a part of the front covering means has transparency, and the blade member is configured to be visible through the front covering means.

  According to the means B-2-a, the visibility of the blade member and the visibility of the game ball moving around the opening and closing start winning means are provided by providing the front covering means for covering the front of the openable start winning means. Is relatively reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference between the pseudo blade opening mode and the mode in which the blade member is truly set to the open position, and it is immediately recognized that the pseudo blade opening mode is provided by the movement path of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Means B-2-b. The pre-covering means includes a first object display unit that models a first object,
The blade member (a pseudo blade member corresponding to a unit B-4 described later) includes a second object display unit that models a second object,
When the blade member (the pseudo blade member corresponding to the unit B-4) is in the open position (the functional position corresponding to the unit B-4), the second object is moved to the first position. It will be in a completed display state that models the third object together with the object,
By setting the blade member (a pseudo blade member corresponding to the unit B-4) to the closed position (a standby position corresponding to the unit B-4), the whole or large of the second object is set. An incomplete display state in which a portion is hidden behind the first object,
Means B characterized in that when the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived by the pseudo-blade opening mode, the pseudo-blade opening mode is set to the completed display state in which the pseudo-blade opening mode forms the third object together with the first object. -2-a gaming machine.

  According to the means B-2-b, the first object display section is provided for the front covering means, and the third object is formed together with the first object when the opening position is reached for the blade member. By providing the second object display unit for displaying the two objects, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front covering means, or to start the winning prize means, while gathering the line of sight to the third object that operates according to the displacement of the blade member. The player's interest in how the game ball enters the ball can be reduced. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting winning means is further enhanced.

  Also, the pseudo blade opening means can bring the completed object display state in which the third object is displayed, without having to set the blade member to the open position. Therefore, it is possible to more positively perform the effect using the third object. Furthermore, even when the pseudo-blade opening mode is derived, the pseudo-blade member may be displaced to the open position because the display is in a completed display state in which the third object (which is easy for a player to recognize as a shape) is formed. The reality of the blade open mode can be further increased.

Means B-2-c-1. In the covered area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the front covering means, a pseudo prize detecting means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
Means B-2-a or B-2, wherein a pseudo prize mode as if the start prize detection means is detected is derived based on the detection of the pseudo prize detection means. The gaming machine according to -b.

  According to the means B-2-c-1, in the covered area where the front is covered by the front covering means, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the openable start winning means. That is, in the configuration in which the front covering means is provided, the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the openable / closed start winning means is relatively low, and based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, A pseudo prize mode is derived in which a game ball that has entered the covered area on the back side of the covering means may have entered the openable prize winning means (for example, a pseudo prize placed in the covered area like the openable prize winning means). Based on the detection of the prize detecting means, the same reaction as when the start prize detecting means is detected is derived, or when derived, it indicates that the reaction is due to the detection of the starting prize detecting means. And so on). Therefore, as an action of the game ball with respect to the opening / closing start winning means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern of "may be entered" can be added. Opportunities and types of effects can be increased, and effects can be diversified. As a result, the value of making it difficult to determine whether or not the game ball enters the start winning means by providing the front cover means (producing whether the game ball has entered the openable start winning means) is dramatically increased. It is possible to improve the interest.

Means B-2-c-2. When the start prize detecting means is detected, a ball detection corresponding display means capable of deriving a ball detection corresponding display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection is provided,
When the detection of the pseudo winning a prize detection unit is performed, the display unit corresponding to the ball detection unit displays a display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection in a mode different from the display corresponding to the ball detection corresponding to the display corresponding to the ball detection. The gaming machine according to B-2-c-1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to be derived.

  In a configuration in which a ball entry detection corresponding display is displayed when a game ball enters the opening / closing start winning means, the state of the ball entering the opening / closing start winning means of the game ball is made difficult to see by the front covering means. Even at this point, when the ball-in detection corresponding display is not displayed, it is immediately recognized that the game ball has not entered the openable start winning mechanism. In this regard, as in the means B-2-c-2, it is possible to display the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display, so that even at the timing when the ball-in detection corresponding display is displayed, the game ball is still open / close start winning. The fact that the result of whether or not the ball has entered the means can be extended, and an effect such as one of the display corresponding to the detection of the input ball and the display corresponding to the detection of the pseudo ball can be performed. Therefore, the effect of determining whether or not the game ball has entered the open / close start winning means can be made more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo-blade opening mode (the effect of whether the game ball has entered the opening / closing type start winning means), and to improve the interest.

  Means B-2-c-3. When the start winning detecting means is detected, before deriving an incoming ball detection corresponding display (final reservation icon) corresponding to the detection, the same as the pseudo ball detection corresponding display (pseudo pending icon) is performed. The gaming machine according to means B-2-c-2, wherein a precursor display (temporary hold icon) as an aspect is configured to be able to be derived.

  According to the means B-2-c-3, at the stage where the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display or the precursor display is displayed, the pleasure of whether or not this changes to the ball-in detection detection display is ensured, and the ball-in detection is performed. It is possible to clarify the difference between the mode of the corresponding display and the pseudo ball detection corresponding display (to make it easy to understand that the pseudo ball detection corresponding display is not the ball detection corresponding display). In other words, if the ball-entry detection corresponding display and the pseudo ball-entry detection corresponding display are closely looked at, they differ, but if they are in the same or indistinguishable form, the player may It is possible to avoid a situation in which the display for ball detection is assumed to be the display for ball entry detection to the last, and a feeling of distrust is given.

Means B-2-c-4. There is a state where the detection by the start winning detection unit is effective as a trigger of the winning / wrong lottery, and an invalid state,
In a state in which the detection by the starting winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means covered with the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is valid,
Any of the means B-2-c-1 to B-2-c-3, wherein the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. The gaming machine described in Crab.

  According to the means B-2-c-4, in a state where the incoming ball detection correspondence display should not be displayed, the pseudo incoming ball detection corresponding display is displayed, so that it is the pseudo incoming ball detection corresponding display. It is possible to avoid a situation where the user is clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the appearance of the pseudo-incoming ball detection corresponding display is unnecessarily derived and causes a decrease in interest.

Means B-3. First start winning means in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
The game ball moving in the game area is configured to be able to change its state between an open state in which it can enter the ball and a closed state in which it cannot enter the ball or is difficult to enter the ball. A second start winning means as the openable start winning means disposed on the downstream side of the area);
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball having entered the first start winning means;
A second start winning detection unit as the start winning detection unit that detects a game ball that has entered the second start winning unit;
The main control unit is configured to perform the winning / rejecting lottery based on the detection of the first start winning detection unit or the second start winning detection unit,
The gaming machine according to means B-2, wherein the front covering means collectively covers at least the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means.

  According to the means B-3, the pre-covering means which collectively covers the front of the first start winning means and the second start winning means (openable start winning means) causes the game ball to be turned into the first start winning means and the second start winning means. It is difficult to tell which of the means the ball has entered. Therefore, when the second starting winning means is set to be in an open state with a balance that allows the player to proceed with the game without receiving much stress, the player is placed behind the front covering means. As long as the game ball enters the game, the game ball can enter one of the first start winning means and the second start winning means, and the game can be advanced as if a winning or failing lottery is received. . In other words, even if the ball entry rate of the game balls into the first start winning means is low, if the game balls enter the second start winning means relatively easily, the winning or losing lottery can be received constantly. Since there is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it is difficult to visually recognize whether the game ball has entered the first starting prize means or the second starting prize means. The user does not have to worry about whether the game ball easily enters the winning means. As a result, even if the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting winning means is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression due to that.

  In addition, by providing the pre-covering means, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. In other words, if a game ball is launched aiming at the front covering means, a relatively easy-to-understand visual image can be obtained in which the player enters the ball in either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. In addition, more dynamic decoration and the like can be performed in the pre-covering means that collectively covers the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, and the design can be improved.

  In the pre-covering means, a part covering the first starting winning means and a part covering the second starting winning means may be formed integrally (integrally formed or united separately). , May be arranged adjacent to each other. In addition, "a part of the front covering means in which a game ball can pass through at least a game area behind the front covering means (for example, covers the front of a prize means such as a first start prize means and a second start prize means". (A part other than the part) is configured to have transparency (made of a transparent or translucent material, or form a slit, etc.) ". In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which a player or the like who plays a game for the first time becomes uneasy because he or she cannot see what is happening behind the front covering means. Further, for example, the pre-coating means may be used as a place for teaching predetermined information to a player. For example, the pre-covering means may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of success / failure lottery, etc.), or to display an image character or the like.

Means B-4-a. The pseudo blade opening means is disposed in front of the blade member, and is capable of covering the front of the blade member in the open position and the functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member in the closed position. Equipped with a pseudo blade member that can be displaced between the standby position,
When the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, a game ball is configured to be able to pass through the game area behind the pseudo blade member. The gaming machine according to any of B-1 to B-3.

  According to the means B-4-a, the pseudo vane opening mode can be more realistically derived. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo blade opening means imitating the mode of the blade member behind the blade member. In this case, since the pseudo blade opening means is disposed relatively behind, the pseudo There is a concern that the blade opening means becomes difficult to see even if the pseudo blade opening mode is set. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball passes in front of the pseudo blade opening means in the pseudo blade opening mode. As a result, there is a possibility that it is instantaneously grasped that the pseudo blade opening mode is pseudo. In this regard, the provision of the pseudo blade member in front of the blade member can eliminate the above concern.

  In addition, since the pseudo blade member can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member is kept in the closed position, the opening and closing type start winning means (second start winning means) is more likely to enter a game ball than necessary. Directly, a mode in which the pseudo blade member operates (for example, a mode in which the character operates when the pseudo blade member is part of the character display, a mode in which the opening / closing start winning means is opened / closed (delicately), etc.) is produced. Can also be fully utilized.

  Incidentally, the shape of the pseudo blade member is not limited to a plate shape, for example, a square frame shape that can be opened in the displacement direction of the pseudo blade member and accommodate the blade member inside, or the square frame shape It may be configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section with a part cut away. Moreover, regarding the means B-2 and the means B-3, the pseudo blade member in the functional position may be projected outward from the outer edge of the front covering means. In other words, while making it difficult to understand the location of the blade member, it is easy to understand the location of the pseudo blade member so that the effect using the pseudo blade member can be recognized, while paying attention to the opening and closing of the blade member. It is possible to have the game proceed while restraining the game from being performed.

  Means B-4-b. The gaming machine according to (B-4-a), wherein the pseudo-blade opening unit also displaces the pseudo-blade member to the functional position when the blade member is displaced to the open position. .

  According to the means B-4-b, when the blade member is at the open position, the blade member is viewed from the front, and when the blade member is at the closed position, the pseudo member is at the functional position. The aspect in which the blade member is viewed from the front can be the same (in both cases, the pseudo blade member at the functional position is visually recognized). Therefore, the reality of the pseudo vane opening mode can be further increased. In addition, in the case of employing this configuration, it is not necessary to make the front side of the blade member the same as that of the pseudo blade member. You don't have to do it. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the blade member, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member, the figure or the like rubs with the pseudo blade member, and the design is deteriorated. Can be prevented.

  Means B-4-c. The means B-, wherein the blade member and the pseudo blade member are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member extend on the same straight line. The gaming machine according to 4-a or B-4-b.

  According to the means B-4-c, it is possible to relatively easily synchronize the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member is being displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member to cover the front of the blade member. Therefore, operational effects such as making the location of the blade member difficult to understand can be further achieved. The pseudo shaft connected to the pseudo blade member may be inserted inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft connected to the blade member. In this case, the rotation axes of the blade member and the pseudo blade member can be relatively easily extended on the same straight line.

  Means B-4-d. The blade member presses the pseudo blade member when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and displaces the pseudo blade member from the standby position to the functional position. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-4-a to B-4-c, comprising a unit.

  According to the means B-4-d, when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and the blade member is driven first (mainly), the pseudo blade member follows the driving. For this reason, it is avoided that each operates independently, and it is possible to synchronize and move the blade member and the pseudo blade member as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the functional position are shifted, and the blade member is displaced to the open position, or only the pseudo blade member is displaced to the functional position. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is easy to understand whether or not it is just the case.

  In the case where the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the standby position to the functional position, the blade-side driving means for operating the blade member, and the pseudo blade The blade-side driving means of the pseudo-side driving means for operating the member may be driven.

  Means B-4-e. The pseudo-blade member presses the blade member when the pseudo-blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, and the pseudo-side pressing displaces the blade member from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-4-a to B-4-d, characterized by comprising a section.

  According to the means B-4-e, when the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pseudo blade member is driven first (mainly), the blade member follows it. For this reason, it is avoided that each operates independently, and it is possible to synchronize and move the blade member and the pseudo blade member as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the closed position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the standby position are shifted, and whether the blade member is in the open position or only the pseudo blade member is in the functional position This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which it is easy to understand whether or not the information only exists.

  When the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pseudo blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, the blade-side driving means for operating the blade member, and the pseudo blade The pseudo-side driving unit of the pseudo-side driving unit for operating the member may be driven.

  Means B-4-f. The means B-4-a, wherein the blade member is made of a material which is colorless and transparent or has a hue similar to the color of a member located behind the blade member in the open position. To the gaming machine according to any one of B-4-e.

  According to the means B-4-f, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the blade member (it is difficult to confirm the operation and location of the blade member). Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further achieved.

Means B-4-g. Sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The opening and closing control of the opening and closing start winning means is executed by the main control means,
The driving control of the pseudo blade opening means is executed by the sub-control means (corresponding to information on opening / closing of the opening / closing type start winning means from the main control means). The gaming machine according to any one of a to B-4-f.

  According to the means B-4-g, the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

B-4-h. The pseudo blade opening means,
When the blade member at the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member at the standby position is displaced to the functional position,
When the blade member in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo blade member in the functional position is displaced to the functional position,
Prior to the process of displacing the blade member to the open position, the main control unit outputs to the sub-control unit opening schedule information indicating that the blade member is displaced to the open position.
The gaming machine according to means B-4-g, wherein the sub-control means, when receiving the opening schedule information, displaces the pseudo wing member to the standby position.

  According to the means B-4-h, when the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member is already in the functional position, so that the blade member being displaced is covered with the pseudo blade member. Can be avoided.

Means B-4-i. The pseudo blade member has a larger front surface area than the blade member,
When the blade member is at the open position and the pseudo blade member is at the functional position, the side of the pseudo blade member closer to the standby position than the surface of the blade member on the closed position side. Is located on the closed position side,
When the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the standby position, the side of the pseudo blade member closer to the functional position than the surface of the blade member on the open position side. The gaming machine according to the means B-4-g or the means B-4-h, wherein the side is located on the open position side.

  When the opening / closing control of the blade member and the drive control of the pseudo blade member are performed by different control means, there is a possibility that the operation start timing of the blade member and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member are slightly shifted. In this regard, according to the means B-4-i, the operation direction side of the previously operable blade member is configured to be extraly covered with the pseudo blade member, and the blade member is displaced slightly earlier. Also fall within the range covered by the pseudo blade member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vane member from being easily displaced or not, and to prevent the operation of the vane member from deviating from the operation of the pseudo vane member to cause a deterioration in design. it can.

Means B-4-j. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged below a central portion of the game board,
At least the blade member is in the open position, and when the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the upper side of the pseudo blade member disposed forward of the blade member is higher than the upper surface of the blade member. The gaming machine according to means B-4-a to B-4-i, wherein the gaming machine is also configured to be positioned above.

  In general, when a player plays a gaming machine, the positional relationship is such that the face of the player faces the center of the gaming board. When the wing member and the pseudo wing member are disposed below the center of the game board, the player's line of sight to the wing member and the pseudo wing member faces diagonally downward (the wing member and the pseudo wing member are oblique). (Looking from above). For this reason, even if the blade member and the pseudo blade member are arranged before and after, there is a concern that the distinction between the blade member and the pseudo blade member may be instantaneously made.

  On the other hand, according to the means B-4-j, since the upper side of the pseudo blade member at the functional position is located above the upper surface of the blade member at the open position, the blade member at the open position and The pseudo blade members in the functional position can be disposed so as to overlap as much as possible when viewed from the upper front. Therefore, the effect of increasing the reality of the pseudo blade opening mode is further achieved.

  Means B-4-k. In the game area, a specific covering area whose front is covered by the pseudo blade member at the functional position, or at a position adjacent or close to the downstream side of the specific covering area, a traveling direction of a game ball moving in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-4-a to B-4-j, further comprising: a course changing means for changing the distance.

  For example, even if the game ball enters the specific covering area and the blade member is in the open position, even if the game ball reaches the guide point guided by the blade member to the opening / closing start winning means (ball receiving portion), When the blade member is at the closed position, the game ball naturally flows down the game area without being guided by the blade member and is discharged to the outside of the specific covering area. At this time, when the trajectory of the game ball incident on the specific covering area and the trajectory of the game ball after being ejected from the specific covering area extend substantially in a straight line, the game ball incident on the covering area just before is a blade member. Without being guided to the game, and thus without entering the start winning means, it is immediately recognized as having been discharged from the specific covered area.

  In this regard, as in the means B-4-k, the game ball after entering the specific covering area is provided by the course changing means provided in the specific covering area or in a position adjacent to or downstream of the specific covering area. Is difficult to follow. Therefore, it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the specific covering area and the game ball that has jumped out of the specific covering area to an easily visible place, and the game ball is guided by the blade member, and the opening / closing start-up is performed. It is possible to create more situations in which a prize may have entered the prize means (second start prize means) or may not have entered the prize.

  In addition, "the side portion of the pseudo blade member at the functional position on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position than the surface of the blade member at the open position on the closed position side. ". Further, the game ball guided by the blade member at the open position may be configured so as to be covered by the pseudo blade member at the functional position. In this case, it can be made more difficult to determine whether the game ball has been guided by the blade member.

  Incidentally, corresponding to the means B-2, "the course changing means may be provided also in a covering area covered by the front covering means". In this case, it becomes more difficult to grasp the behavior of the game ball in the covered area, and it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has been discharged from the covered area. Further, corresponding to the means B-2-d, "the course changing means includes pseudo winning a prize guide means for guiding a game ball moving in the covered area to the pseudo prize detecting means". Is also good. In this case, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo prize detecting means. For example, although the pseudo prize detecting means is provided, it has to be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass much due to an installation space or the like. And a situation in which it hardly functions can be avoided. Furthermore, the time lag from when the game ball enters the covered area to when it is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the start winning means is longer, and the game ball that has entered the covered area, The effect of making the correspondence with the game balls discharged from the covered area ambiguous is more remarkably exhibited.

Means B-5-a. The pseudo blade opening means,
A pseudo-open object provided at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the blade member at the open position, and simulating the blade member at the open position;
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 and B-4, further comprising: a simulated light source that irradiates the simulated open object with light.

  According to the means B-5, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade opening mode while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Incidentally, a pseudo blade member as described in the means B-4 may be used in combination. Further, corresponding to the means B-2 or B-3, "at least a part of the pre-coating means is configured as a light guide plate, and light is incident on the light guide plate from the end by the pseudo light source. By doing so, the light guide plate may be configured so that the pseudo open object emerges at a position covering the front of the blade member at the open position. " In this case, the pseudo-blade opening mode can be derived in the pre-coating means, and the visibility of the pseudo-blade opening mode can be improved. In addition, in the pre-covering means, the pseudo blade opening mode can be visually recognized only when the dummy light source emits light.

Means B-5-b. The blade member (when the configuration of the means B-4 is used in combination, the “pseudo blade member”) includes a light emitting unit that can be visually recognized from the front,
The gaming machine according to means B-5-a, wherein the pseudo open object of the pseudo blade opening means is formed so as to imitate at least the light emitting means.

  According to the means B-5-b, the wing member (pseudo wing member) is visually recognized as if it is emitting light, so that the wing member is in the open position, the pseudo open object and the pseudo open object. It is possible to more strongly associate the pseudo-blade opening mode by the pseudo-blade opening means using the light source for use (it can be confused with an intuitive judgment at a glance). Further, it is also possible to simplify the configuration (shape) of the pseudo-opening object of the pseudo-blade opening means (it is sufficient to imitate only the light-emitting means, not the whole, to achieve a sufficiently pseudo-form).

Means B-5-c. The pseudo open object is not only a position overlapping the blade member in the open position in the front-back direction, but also a position overlapping the blade member in the closed position in the front-back direction, and a position overlapping the blade member in the open position. It is also provided at a position between the overlapping position,
The gaming machine according to means B-5-a or B-5-b, wherein the simulation light source is configured to sequentially irradiate light to each of the pseudo open objects.

  According to the means B-5-c, it is possible to derive a mode that simulates the opening and closing operation of the blade member. Therefore, it is possible to derive more realistic and various pseudo blade opening modes.

Means B-6. Opening-time covering means for covering the front of the blade member in the open position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, further comprising at least one of a closing covering means for covering a front of the blade member at the closed position.

  According to the means B-6, the blade member at the closed position or the open position is hidden, so that it is difficult to determine whether the blade member is at the open position or the closed position. In particular, with respect to the means B-4, when the position of the blade member does not correspond to the position of the pseudo blade member, the function and effect of the present means are further exhibited. In addition, as in the above-described means B-4-k, in the area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the disclosure covering means, or in a portion adjacent to the downstream side of the area, the progress of the game ball moving in the game area. A course changing means for changing the direction may be provided. That is, for example, even in a configuration in which the pseudo blade member is not provided as in the above-described unit B-4-k, it is difficult to determine whether or not the blade member is at the open position. By providing the means, basically the same operational effects as those of the means B-4-k can be obtained.

  C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the launch means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a win / fail lottery as to whether or not a hit state is generated is performed, and a win / fail lottery is displayed on the variable display means. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

  In addition, as start-up winning means, there is provided an openable start-up winning means which is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered only when a predetermined open lottery is won, and a game ball enters the start-winning means. It is known to set a playable state and a state in which it is difficult to enter a ball, thereby giving inflection to the playability. However, the opening / closing type start winning means only opens and closes according to the result of the open lottery, and the behavior itself is monotonous. Further, the game ball that has reached the opening / closing start winning means can enter the ball if the opening / closing start winning means is in the open state, and cannot enter the ball if it is in the closed state. The behavior of a game ball moving around the means is relatively monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the performance of start winning and enhance the interest. .

Means C-1. Firing means for firing a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
Starting prize winning means in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
Starting prize detecting means for detecting a game ball having entered the starting prize means,
A main control unit for performing a winning / non-passing lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the start winning prize detecting unit, and generating the special gaming state based on the result of the winning / rejecting lottery A gaming machine comprising:
In the game area, a game ball is provided so as to be able to pass between the game board and the game board, and a starting means (entrance of) the winning prize means or a guide means for guiding the game ball to the starting prize means ( (A game ball guided to the game ball) is configured to be displaceable between a functional position for covering the front of the game and the standby position for exposing the start winning means or the guide means to the front, and at least a part thereof has transparency. A gaming machine, comprising: a movable covering means.

  According to the means C-1, when the movable covering means is in the functional position, even though the movable covering means has transparency, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means, or The visibility as to whether the ball has been guided by the guiding means is relatively low. In particular, when the movable covering means is in operation or immediately after the movement, the player's line of sight is hung on the movable covering means, and this tendency becomes more intense. Therefore, it is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the player loses an eye for a moment even if the player is following the game ball, or that the player may easily try to grasp the movement of the game ball in another way, and there is a new effect there. It is possible to obtain an opportunity to add (where the game ball moves to, and as a result, an effect that teaches and suggests what happens on another display means). As a result, more dramatic developments and effects can be generated with respect to the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means (starting winning), and the interest can be improved.

  Note that, in the main embodiment described above, the movable covering means of the present means C-1 is constituted by the pseudo-blade member 431, and the general part is constituted by the front decoration part 403.

  Means C-2. A specific covering area of which the front is covered by the movable covering means at the functional position in the gaming area, or a direction in which a game ball moving in the gaming area moves at a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the specific covering area. The gaming machine according to means C-1, further comprising a course changing means for changing the game path.

  For example, even if a game ball enters a specific covering area whose front is covered by the movable covering means at the functional position, the ball enters the starting winning means provided in the specific covering area, or is guided by the guiding means. Otherwise, the game balls naturally flow down the game area and are discharged to the outside of the specific covering area. At this time, when the trajectory of the game ball entering the specific covering area and the trajectory of the game ball after being ejected from the specific covering area extend substantially in a straight line, the game ball that has entered the covering area has just started. Without entering the means, it is immediately grasped (specified) as having been discharged from the specific covered area.

  In this regard, as in the case of the means C-2, the course change means is provided at a position adjacent or adjacent to the specific covering area or on the downstream side thereof, so that a game ball after entering the specific covering area is moved. Is difficult to follow. Therefore, it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the specific covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the specific covered area to an easily visible place, and the game ball enters the start winning means, It is possible to create more situations that may or may not have been guided by the guidance means. Thus, by providing the movable covering means, even if it is difficult to determine whether the game ball has won the starting prize, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is immediately grasped whether the game ball has won the starting prize. In the case where an effect that teaches and suggests what has happened to the game ball that has entered the specific covered area is performed, the effect can be made more effective.

Means C-3-a. In the game area, provided with a distance that allows a game ball to pass between the game board and the game board, provided with a pre-covering means that covers at least the front of the start winning means,
The front covering means is provided adjacent to or close to the movable covering means (in a front view) (provided so as not to be displaceable relative to the game board), and at least partially has transparency. With a general part having
The gaming machine according to means C-2, wherein the course changing means is provided in a general covering area of the gaming area, the front of which is covered by the general part.

  According to the means C-3-a, the behavior of the game ball in the covered area (the general covered area and the specific covered area) behind the front covering means becomes more difficult to grasp, and the game ball that has entered the covered area and It is possible to make it difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the discharged game balls. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations in which the game ball that has entered the covered area may have entered the starting prize winning means or may not have entered the ball. In addition, "the front covering means may be attached to a game board".

  Means C-3-b. The gaming machine according to means C-3-a, wherein the front covering unit is configured to cover at least a part of the front of the movable covering unit.

  According to the means C-3-b, it is possible to derive more diverse effects by combining the pre-coating means and the movable covering means in a more complicated manner. Further, hiding the link mechanism portion of the movable covering means, hiding the movable covering means in a predetermined state (position), supporting the movable covering means, and guiding the displacement of the movable covering means. Can be.

Means C-4-a. In a covered area (general covered area) of which the front is covered by the front covering means in the gaming area, a pseudo prize detecting means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided,
The gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein a pseudo prize mode as if the start prize detection unit has been detected can be derived based on the detection by the pseudo prize detection unit.

  According to the means C-4-a, the false winning detection means is provided together with the start winning means in the covered area whose front is covered by the front covering means. That is, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively reduced by the provision of the pre-covering means, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, Deriving a pseudo prize mode in which a game ball that has entered the covered area on the back side may have entered the starting prize winning means (for example, detection of a pseudo prize detecting means installed in the covered area similarly to the starting prize means) Derives the same reaction as when the start prize detecting means is detected, and if it derives, suggests whether the reaction is due to the detection of the start prize detecting means, etc.) Can be. Therefore, as an action of the game ball with respect to the starting winning prize means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern of "may have entered" can be added, and the production opportunity and It is possible to increase the types of the effects and diversify the effects. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means by providing the front covering means (drafting whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means). And can improve the interest.

  Further, corresponding to the means C-3, "the course changing means includes a pseudo prize guide means for guiding a game ball moving in the covered area (general covered area) to the pseudo prize detecting means. That ". In this case, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo prize detecting means. For example, although the pseudo prize detecting means is provided, it has to be installed at a position where the game ball does not pass much due to an installation space or the like. And a situation in which it hardly functions can be avoided. Furthermore, the time lag from when the game ball enters the covered area to when it is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the start winning means is longer, and the game ball that has entered the covered area, The effect of making the correspondence with the game balls discharged from the covered area ambiguous is more remarkably exhibited.

Means C-4-b. When the start prize detecting means is detected, a ball detection corresponding display means capable of deriving a ball detection corresponding display (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection is provided,
In the case where the detection by the pseudo winning detection unit is performed, the display unit corresponding to the incoming ball detection displays the display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection in a different form from the display corresponding to the input ball detection ( The gaming machine according to C-4-a, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to derive a pseudo hold icon.

  According to the means C-4-b, even if the start winning means is not directly viewed, the game ball enters the start winning means and the right or wrong is selected by visually recognizing the incoming ball detection corresponding display means. Can be obtained (rather easy to understand). Therefore, even if the appearance of the game ball entering the start winning detection means becomes somewhat difficult to see, it is possible to securely check whether or not the game ball has entered by the entry detection corresponding display means. Can give the person a sense of security.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a ball entry detection corresponding display is displayed when a game ball enters the start winning unit, the state of the ball entering the start winning unit of the game ball is made difficult to see by the movable covering unit. Also, at the point in time when the display for ball entry detection is not displayed, it is immediately grasped that the game ball has not entered the start winning unit. In this regard, by enabling display of the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display, it is possible to know whether or not the game ball has entered the start winning means even at the timing when the ball-in detection corresponding display is displayed. It can be extended, and it is possible to perform an effect such as any one of the display corresponding to the detection of the incoming ball and the display corresponding to the detection of the simulated incoming ball. Therefore, the effect of determining whether or not a game ball has entered the start winning means can be made more interesting.

  In addition, "when the detection of the start winning detection means is performed in a state where the pseudo ball detection corresponding display is displayed, the ball detection corresponding display is displayed instead of the pseudo ball detection corresponding display. Be configured to be derivable ”. In this case, the visual recognition mode of the area where the incoming ball detection corresponding display and the pseudo incoming ball detection corresponding display are displayed can be made relatively simple. Further, it may be configured such that “the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed”. In other words, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display is displayed forever and the role of the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display becomes difficult to understand.

  Means C-4-c. When the start winning detecting means is detected, before deriving an incoming ball detection corresponding display (final reservation icon) corresponding to the detection, the same as the pseudo ball detection corresponding display (pseudo pending icon) is performed. The gaming machine according to means C-4-b, wherein the precursor display (temporary hold icon) as an aspect is configured to be able to be derived.

  According to the means C-4-c, when the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display or the precursor display is displayed, the pleasure of whether or not this is changed to the ball-in detection detection display is ensured, and the ball-in detection corresponding display is ensured. And the difference between the pseudo-ball-in detection display and the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display can be clarified (it is easy to understand that the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display is not the ball-in detection detection display). In other words, if the ball-entry detection corresponding display and the pseudo ball-entry detection corresponding display are closely looked at, they differ, but if they are in the same or indistinguishable form, the player may It is possible to avoid a situation in which the display for ball detection is assumed to be the display for ball entry detection to the last, and a feeling of distrust is given.

  Means C-4-d. A detection history storage unit capable of storing a detection history (time of each detection) of the start winning detection unit and a detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo winning detection unit is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-4-a to C-4-c, which is configured to output information.

  According to the means C-4-d, by recognizing the pseudo winning mode, the player misunderstands that the game ball has entered the starting winning means (for example, when the player detects the pseudo winning state). In the unlikely event that a trouble occurs due to, for example, misunderstanding the correspondence display with the ball entry detection correspondence display, data for explaining the circumstances can be reliably obtained. To be sent to the user), thereby avoiding a situation in which the trouble is twisted.

Means C-4-e. Sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The gaming machine according to any of means C-4-a to C-4-d, wherein the false winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub control means.

  According to the means C-4-e, the information input to the main control means and the number of components for inputting information to the main control means are reduced as much as possible, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced. It is possible to suppress improper control of the control means.

Means C-4-f. There is a state where the detection by the start winning detection unit is effective as a trigger of the winning / wrong lottery, and an invalid state,
In a state in which the detection by the starting prize detecting means corresponding to a predetermined starting prize winning means among the starting prize winning means corresponding to the movable covering means (the front part is covered by the front covering means), the pseudo prize is provided. The detection by the detection means is enabled,
The means according to any one of means C-4-a to C-4-e, wherein the detection of the false winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. Gaming machine.

  According to the means C-4-f, in a state where the incoming ball detection corresponding display should not be displayed, the pseudo incoming ball detection corresponding display is displayed, thereby clearly indicating that the display is the pseudo incoming ball detection corresponding display. It is possible to avoid a situation in which recognition is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the appearance of the pseudo-incoming ball detection corresponding display is unnecessarily derived and causes a decrease in interest.

Means C-5. A winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the starting winning detecting means,
Comprising a sound effect generating means capable of generating a mixed winning effect sound close to the winning effect sound,
The sound effect generating means,
Based on the detection of the starting winning detection means, to generate the winning effect sound or the confusion winning effect sound,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-4, wherein the mixed winning effect sound is generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means.

  According to the means C-5, even if the starting winning means is not directly visually recognized, it is possible to confirm the entry of the game ball into the starting winning means by the sound effect, so that the game can proceed more smoothly. it can. In addition, the confusion winning effect sound is generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, and the confusion winning effect sound is also generated based on the detection of the starting winning detection means. Productions that may be more realistic.

Means C-6-a. The opening / closing start winning prize, wherein the guide means is configured to be capable of changing a state between an open state where a game ball moving in the game area can enter the ball and a closed state where the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. An open position for guiding a game ball moving to the side of the open / close start winning means to the open / close start win means, provided in correspondence with the open / close start win means; By displacing between the closed position that restricts the movement of the game ball moving to the side to the openable start winning means side, the openable start winning means is brought into the open state and the closed state. It is configured as a changing blade member,
The movable covering unit may be configured to cover the front of the blade member at the open position by being set to the functional position. The described gaming machine.

  According to the means C-6-a, it is possible to make it difficult for the movable covering means to determine whether the blade member of the opening / closing start winning means is at the open position. Note that "a side portion of the movable covering means in the functional position on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position than a surface of the blade member in the open position on the closed position side. ". Further, the game ball guided by the blade member at the open position may be configured to be covered at the front by the movable covering means at the functional position. In this case, it can be made more difficult to determine whether the game ball has been guided by the blade member.

  In addition, corresponding to the means C-3, "the front covering means (general part) includes a first object display section which models a first object, and the movable covering means forms a second object. A second object display section, and the movable covering means is set to the functional position, whereby the second object is brought into a completed display state in which the second object and the first object form a third object. The standby position may be an incomplete display state in which all or most of the second object is hidden behind the first object. "

  In this case, the first object display section is provided for the front covering means (general section), and the second object is formed together with the first object when the function position is reached for the movable covering means. Is provided, a line of sight is gathered to a third object or the like that operates according to the displacement of the movable covering means, while the visibility of the back side of the front covering means is reduced, or the starting winning means is provided. The player's interest in how the game ball enters the ball can be reduced. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the decrease in the ease with which the game ball enters one of the start winning means is further enhanced.

  D. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by the launch means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a win / fail lottery as to whether or not a hit state is generated is performed, and a win / fail lottery is displayed on the variable display means. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

  In recent years, at the stage before the variable display is executed, an effect (so-called pre-reading effect, hold effect) that suggests the content of the variable display may be performed. However, such suggestive effects are becoming rustic, and the effect of improving the interest is decreasing.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest in starting winning.

Means D-1. Firing means for firing a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
Starting prize winning means in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
Starting prize detecting means for detecting a game ball having entered the starting prize means,
A main control unit for performing a winning / non-passing lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the start winning prize detecting unit, and generating the special gaming state based on the result of the winning / rejecting lottery A gaming machine comprising:
In the game area, provided with a distance that allows a game ball to pass between the game board and the game board, provided with a pre-covering means that covers at least the front of the start winning means,
In the covered area of the game area, the front of which is covered by the front covering means, a pseudo prize detecting means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to derive a pseudo prize mode as if the start prize detection unit was detected based on the detection of the pseudo prize detection unit.

  According to the means D-1, in the covering area where the front is covered by the front covering means, the false winning detecting means is provided together with the starting winning means. That is, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning means is relatively reduced by the provision of the pre-covering means, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, Deriving a pseudo prize mode in which a game ball that has entered the covered area on the back side may have entered the starting prize winning means (for example, detection of a pseudo prize detecting means installed in the covered area similarly to the starting prize means) Derives the same reaction as when the start prize detecting means is detected, and if it derives, suggests whether the reaction is due to the detection of the start prize detecting means, etc.) Can be. Therefore, as an action of the game ball with respect to the starting winning prize means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern of "may have entered" can be added, and the production opportunity and It is possible to increase the types of the effects and diversify the effects. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game ball enters the starting winning means by providing the front covering means (drafting whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means). And can improve the interest.

  It should be noted that one or more start winning means may be provided. In addition, the pre-covering means may be attached to the game board. Examples of the pseudo prize mode include a display mode on a predetermined display unit, a voice mode by a voice output unit, a light-emitting mode by a predetermined light-emitting unit, and a combination thereof.

Means D-2. When the detection of the start winning prize detecting means is performed, there is provided an incoming ball detection corresponding display means capable of deriving an incoming ball detection corresponding display corresponding to the detection,
When the detection of the pseudo winning a prize detection unit is performed, the display unit corresponding to the ball detection unit displays a display corresponding to the pseudo ball detection in a mode different from the display corresponding to the ball detection corresponding to the display corresponding to the ball detection. The gaming machine according to D-1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be derivable.

  In the configuration in which the ball entry detection corresponding display is displayed if a game ball enters the start winning means, even if the state of the ball entering the start winning means of the game ball is made difficult to see by the front covering means, At the point in time when the ball entry detection corresponding display is not displayed, it is immediately grasped that the game ball has not entered the start winning unit. In this regard, by enabling display of the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display as in the means D-2, whether the game ball has yet to enter the start winning means even at the timing when the ball-in detection detection display is displayed. It is possible to postpone knowing whether the result is no or not, and to perform an effect such as any one of the display corresponding to the detection of the incoming ball and the display corresponding to the detection of the pseudo-entering the ball. Therefore, the effect of determining whether or not a game ball has entered the start winning means can be made more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of the effect as to whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning means, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Means D-3. In the case where the detection of the start winning detection means is performed, before deriving a display for detecting a ball corresponding to the detection, it is possible to derive a precursor display which is in the same mode as the display for detecting a false ball detection. The gaming machine according to means D-2, wherein:

  According to the means D-3, at the stage where the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display or the precursor display is displayed, while enjoying the pleasure of whether or not this changes to the ball-in detection detection display, the ball-in detection detection display, This makes it possible to clarify the difference between the display mode and the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display (to make it easy to understand that the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display is not the ball-in detection detection display). In other words, if the ball-entry detection corresponding display and the pseudo ball-entry detection corresponding display are closely looked at, they differ, but if they are in the same or indistinguishable form, the player may It is possible to avoid a situation in which the display for ball detection is assumed to be the display for ball entry detection to the last, and a feeling of distrust is given.

Means D-4. Variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
In the variable display means, display control means for variably displaying the identification information, after a predetermined time, to stop and display the identification information based on the result of the winning / rejection lottery,
An information acquisition unit that acquires information used for the winning / non-selection lottery when the detection of the start winning detection unit is performed;
The information acquired by the information acquisition means, comprising a plurality of hold storage means capable of storing a plurality of up to a predetermined number,
If the detection of the starting winning detection unit is performed during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display unit, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is a variable display of the identification information being executed. Configuration to be performed later,
The mode of the ball entry detection corresponding display of the ball entry detection corresponding display unit is determined based on information acquired by the information acquisition unit stored in the hold storage unit. 3. The gaming machine according to 3.

  According to the means D-4, it is possible to perform more various effects using the display for detecting the input ball and the display for detecting the pseudo inputting ball. For example, if a display of a predetermined type of pseudo ball detection corresponding to a predetermined type is derived based on the detection of the start winning detection means, and if the display is changed to a display of ball detection corresponding to the predetermined type, an expectation of occurrence of a special game state is provided. Suggestive effects such as an increase in degree can be performed. In the state where the number of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the holding storage means has reached the upper limit, even if the false prize detection means performs detection, the pseudo entry ball Do not derive the detection correspondence display. "

  Means D-5. When the pseudo ball detection detection display is displayed, the additional display in a mode different from the pseudo ball detection detection display is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the pseudo ball detection corresponding display. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-2 to D-4.

  According to the means D-5, by making the form of the pseudo ball detection corresponding display at least partially unclear, the form of the pseudo ball detection corresponding display is not determined. It is possible to strongly give an impression that there is a possibility of further change in the incoming ball detection corresponding display. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player confuses the pseudo ball-in detection display with the ball-in detection display, and mistakes the pseudo ball-in detection display as the ball-in detection display. Trouble that may occur in (for example, only the pseudo-ball-in detection corresponding display is performed, but the process that can be executed when the ball-in detection corresponding display is performed by misunderstanding this as the ball-in detection corresponding display Troubles, such as the fact that is not executed, can be suppressed. In addition, "when the additional display is derived also to the precursor display", "instead of the precursor display, when the incoming ball detection corresponding display is derived, it corresponds to the pseudo incoming ball detection corresponding display. The additional display that has been displayed on the display may be deleted. "

  Means D-6. A detection history storage unit capable of storing the detection history (time of each detection) of the start winning detection unit and the detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo winning detection unit is provided, and the storage information of the detection history storage unit is stored. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-5, which is configured to be capable of outputting.

  According to the means D-6, by recognizing the pseudo winning mode, the player misunderstands that the game ball has entered the starting winning means (for example, the player has a pseudo ball detection corresponding display). In the unlikely event that a trouble occurs due to, for example, misunderstanding that the display is compatible with ball entry detection), data for explaining the circumstances can be reliably obtained (for example, the data can be displayed on variable display means or transmitted to the hall computer). ), And it is possible to avoid a situation in which the trouble is twisted.

Means D-7. Sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
The gaming machine according to any of means D-1 to D-6, wherein the false winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub control means.

  According to the means D-7, by reducing the number of information input to the main control means and the number of components for inputting information to the main control means as much as possible, the control load on the main control means can be reduced, Can be suppressed.

  Means D-8. A course changing means for changing a traveling direction of a game ball is provided in a covering area of which the front is covered by the front covering means in the game area, or in a position adjacent or close to a downstream side of the covering area. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-7.

  For example, even if the game ball enters the covered area, if the ball cannot enter the start winning means, it flows down the game area and is discharged outside the covered area. At this time, when the trajectory of the game ball incident on the covered area and the trajectory of the game ball after being ejected from the covered area extend substantially in a straight line, the game ball incident on the covered area just before the first starting prize. It is immediately recognized as having been discharged from the covered area without entering the means and the second starting winning means.

  In this regard, the provision of the course changing means in the covered area as in the means D-8 changes the traveling direction of the game ball in the covered area and delays the traveling speed of the game ball, It is difficult to follow the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the area. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the game ball that has entered the covered area and the game ball that has jumped out of the covered area to an easily visible place, and the game ball may have entered the starting winning means. Can create more situations where you may not have entered the ball.

  Means D-9. The gaming machine according to claim D-8, wherein the course changing unit includes a pseudo winning guide unit that guides the game ball moving in the covered area to the pseudo winning detection unit.

  According to the means D-9, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo prize detecting means. For example, although the pseudo prize detecting means is provided, it is located at a position where the game ball does not pass much due to an installation space or the like. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it has to be installed and hardly functions. Furthermore, the time lag from when the game ball enters the covered area to when it is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the start winning means is longer, and the game ball that has entered the covered area, The effect of making the correspondence with the game balls discharged from the covered area ambiguous is more remarkably exhibited.

Means D-10. There is a state where the detection by the start winning detection unit is effective as a trigger of the winning / wrong lottery, and an invalid state,
In a state in which the detection by the starting winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined starting winning means among the starting winning means covered with the front covering means is valid, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is valid,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-9, wherein in a state where the detection by the predetermined starting prize detecting means is invalid, the detection of the pseudo prize detecting means is invalidated.

  According to the means D-10, in a state where the display for detecting the incoming ball detection should not be displayed, the display for displaying the pseudo-incident ball detection is displayed, so that it is clearly recognized that the display is the display for displaying the pseudo-ball-in detection. Can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the appearance of the pseudo-incoming ball detection corresponding display is unnecessarily derived and causes a decrease in interest.

Means E-1. In the gaming machine according to any one of the means A to D,
Payout means (payout device 358) for paying out game balls;
A ball tray (upper plate 19 or lower plate 15) capable of storing a game ball at a position where a player can contact the ball,
A payout passage for communicating between the payout means and the ball tray,
The dispensing passage,
A first passage extending in a meandering manner in the left-right direction (the front-back direction is also possible);
A second passage provided so as to connect a first position of the first passage and a second position of the first passage downstream of the first position;
Between a first guiding state in which a game ball is guided to the first path and a second guiding state in which a game ball is guided to the second path, provided at a connection between the first path and the second path; A payout time adjusting means comprising a switching means that can be switched in,
Than the first time required when the game ball paid out by the payout means is paid out to the ball tray via the first passage.
A gaming machine characterized in that a second time required when a game ball paid out by the payout means is paid out to the ball tray via the second passage is set shorter.

  According to the means E-1, the timing at which game balls are paid out from the payout means to the ball tray can be shifted back and forth. For this reason, it is determined whether or not a game ball that has entered the covered area on the back side of the front covering means has entered the starting prize winning means (for example, a pseudo-inserted ball) depending on whether or not the game ball has been paid out to the ball tray (prize ball). It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is grasped (before it is taught whether or not the detection correspondence display is the ball entry detection correspondence display). Further, it is also possible to perform an effect by adjusting the payout timing of the game balls. For example, based on a predetermined operation of the player, the payout passage can be switched to the second passage side, and the game balls can be paid out to the ball tray at a timing earlier than usual. Therefore, it is possible to improve performance and playability, and to enhance interest.

  The time required for the game balls paid out by the payout means to be paid out to the ball tray via the payout passage varies depending on the distance, angle, shape (course) and the like of the payout passage.

Means E-2. It has operation means (effect button 125, cross button 126, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to means E-1, wherein the switching means is switched from the first guidance state to the second guidance state based on an operation of the operation means.

Means E-3. Variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
In the variable display means, display control means for variably displaying the identification information, after a predetermined time, to stop and display the identification information based on the result of the winning / rejection lottery,
Information acquisition means for acquiring information used for the winning / failure lottery when the first start prize detection means and the second start prize detection means are detected;
The information acquired by the information acquisition means, comprising a plurality of hold storage means capable of storing a plurality of up to a predetermined number,
When the first start winning detection unit and the second start winning detection unit are detected during the change display of the identification information on the variable display unit, the change display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is displayed. , Is performed after the display of the change of the identification information during execution,
In the state where the information acquired by the information acquisition means is not stored in the hold storage means, the switching means is maintained in the first guidance state, wherein the switching means is maintained in the first guidance state. Gaming machine.

  According to the means E-3, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player stops playing the game and leaves the seat before the game ball is paid out to the ball tray.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above-described units are applied will be described below.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed example of the mode, "the operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, the firing means (firing motor or the like) for playing the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, Ball game machine having a game area in which a game ball is guided and ball entry means (general winning ports, variable winning devices, operating ports, etc.) arranged in the gaming area.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine provided with a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of the mode, "the operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, the firing means (firing motor or the like) for playing the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, The game ball is guided and extends in a substantially vertical direction in a predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface or the like), and each ball entry means (general winning opening, A variable prize device, an operation port, etc.) and configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball-ball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

  Reference numeral 10: pachinko machine, 32: variable winning device, 33a: first starting winning device, 33b: second starting winning device, 34: through gate, 42: decorative symbol display device, 43L: first special display device, 43R: No. 2 Special display device, 261: Main control device, 262: Sub-control device.

Claims (1)

Firing means for firing a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
First start winning means in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
Second start winning means configured to be able to change the state between an open state in which game balls moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which entry is impossible or difficult to enter,
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball having entered the first start winning means;
Second start winning detection means for detecting a game ball having entered the second start winning means;
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection unit or the second start winning detection unit, a win / fail lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is performed, and based on the result of the win / fail lottery. A main control means for generating the special gaming state,
A pre-covering means provided at a distance that allows a game ball to pass between the game board and the game board in the game area, and collectively covers at least the front of the first start winning means and the second start winning means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

Images